For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Planning Basics and Manual Planning in SAP Transportation Management
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
P A R T IC IP A N T H A N D B O O K INSTRUCTOR-LED TRAINING Course Version: 16 Course Duration: 3 Day(s) Material Number: 50132248
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
SAP Copyrights and Trademarks
© 2015 SAP SE. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transm itted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. •
Microsoft, Windows, Excel, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
•
IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, System i, System i5, System p. System p5, System x, System z, System zlO, System z9, zlO, z9, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, eServer, z/VM, z/OS, i5/OS, S/390, OS/390, OS/400, AS/400, S /39 0 Parallel Enterprise Server, PowerVM, Power Architecture, POWER6+, P0WER6, POWER5+, POWER5, POWER, OpenPower, PowerPC, BatchPipes, BladeCenter, System Storage, GPFS, HACMP, RETAIN, DB2 Connect, RACF, Redbooks, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.
•
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.
•
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
•
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
•
UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group.
•
Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.
•
HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
•
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
•
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.
•
SAP, R/3, SAP NetWeaver, Duet, PartnerEdge, ByDesign, SAP BusinessObjects Explorer, StreamWork, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE in Germany and other countries.
•
Business Objects and the Business Objects logo, BusinessObjects, Crystal Reports, Crystal Decisions, Web Intelligence, Xcelsius, and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd. Business Objects is an SAP company.
•
Sybase and Adaptive Server, iAnywhere, Sybase 365, SQL Anywhere, and other Sybase products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sybase, Inc. Sybase is an SAP company.
All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are provided by SAP SE and its affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Typographic Conventions American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used.
This information is displayed in the instructor’s presentation
Demonstration
Procedure
A
Warning or Caution
Hint
O Related or Additional Information
Facilitated Discussion
User interface control
Example text
Window title
Example text
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Contents ix
Course Overview
1
Unit 1:
2
Lesson: Building Freight Units
9 17
Exercise 1: Define Freight Unit Types Exercise 2: Apply Freight Unit Building Rules
21 29
Exercise 3: Create Freight Units Lesson: Building Packages
37 51
Exercise 4: Create Freight Units with Packages Unit 2:
52
Transportation Planning
Lesson: Defining the Transportation Planning Process Lesson: Evaluating Freight Units
58 61 69 75 83
Transportation Demands for Planning
Exercise 5: Examine a Freight Unit Lesson: Creating Freight Orders for Shipping Exercise 6: Create a Freight Order Unit 3:
SAP Transportation Management Transportation Network
85
Lesson: Integrating SAP ERP Master Data with SAP TM
93 102 111 117 125 131 141
Exercise 7: Generate and Activate an Integration Model Lesson: Evaluating Location Masters Exercise 8: Examine Location Masters Lesson: Creating Transportation Zones Exercise 9: Define Transportation Zones Lesson: Defining Methods of Transportation Exercise 10: Create a Means of Transport Lesson: Defining Transportation Lanes Exercise 11: Create Transportation Lanes
145 147 159
Exercise 12: Calculate Durations and Distances using Transportation Lanes Lesson: Creating Carrier Profiles
162 169 172 177 191
Exercise 13: Create Carrier Profiles Lesson: Examining Resources in SAP TM Exercise 14: Define Capacity Limits with Vehicle Resources Unit 4:
Conditions and Incompatibilities
192
Lesson: Defining Conditions in SAP TM
195 199
Lesson: Identifying Incompatibilities Exercise 15: Create Incompatibility for Transportation Groups
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
209
Lesson: Examining Optimizer Planning
211 215
Exercise 16: Create Freight Order Types Lesson: Defining Selection Profiles
223 229 236 241
Exercise 17: Create Selection Profiles and Sub Profiles Lesson: Creating Planning Profiles Exercise 18: Create a Planning Profile Lesson: Creating Capacity Selection Settings
248 249 257
Exercise 19: Create a Capacity Selection Profile Unit 6:
Interactive Planning with the Transportation Cockpit
258 265 270 271 277
Lesson: Customizing the Transportation Cockpit Layout
281 289 293
Exercise 22: Create Freight Orders Interactively Lesson: Examining Freight Order Scheduling
305
306 315 321 327
Exercise 20: Create a Profile and Layout Set Lesson: Customizing the Transportation Cockpit Exercise 21: Customize the Transportation Cockpit Lesson: Performing Interactive Planning
Exercise 23: Schedule a Freight Order Unit 7:
Carrier Selection
Lesson: Performing Carrier Selection Exercise 24: Execute Carrier Selection Lesson: Tendering Freight Orders Exercise 25: Tender a Freight Order
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Course
TARGET AUDIENCE This course is intended for the following audiences:
•
Application Consultant
•
Business Process Architect
•
Business Process Owner/Team Lead/Power User
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
UNIT 1
Transportation Demands for Planning
Lesson 1 Building Freight Units Exercise 1: Define Freight Unit Types Exercise 2: Apply Freight Unit Building Rules Exercise 3: Create Freight Units
2 9 17 21
Lesson 2 Building Packages Exercise 4: Create FreightUnits with Packages
UNIT OBJECTIVES
0
•
Define freight unit types
•
Create freight units and freight unit building rules
•
Create freight units with packages
29 37
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 1 Lesson 1 Building Freight Units
LESSON OVERVIEW This lesson examines the freight planning process in SAP TM, including freight unit building rules, the definition of freight unit types, and strategies for freight unit building. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Define freight unit types
•
Create freight units and freight unit building rules
Freight Planning Process
Order Management
Order-based Transportation Requirement
Delivery-based Transportation Requirement
L
I . . . i ________
F reight U nit Building
------- 1..... rf
Freight Unit
Figure 1: Document Flow (Freight Unit Building Focus)
The planning process in SAP TM can be configured to be as flexible as required. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
The transportation requirement is the document in TM that initiates and supports the planning process. This allows your company to integrate ERP systems and to track and manage the transportation process. Steps in the Freight Planning Process FU Freight Order
N
OTR Sales Order
FU 10 PRODTM-OO 50pc 1500 kg 20 PRODTM-01 100 pc 3000 kg 30 PRODTM -02 200 pc 6000 kg
FU Figure 2: Freight Planning Process
The planning process is broken up into several steps to manage the transportation process. The transportation requirement initiates the planning process. The next step is to determine a transportation planning unit. This planning unit is called a freight unit. During the planning process, freight units can be grouped together to optimize transportation resources. These are called freight orders.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Freight Unit Types Freight units are: ■
A set of goods that can be transported together
■
Used to merge items that can be transported together
■
The smallest unit of freight
■
Used in the planning of freight
Figure 3: Freight Units
Freight units are created from preceding business documents such as forwarding orders, orderbased transportation requirements, or delivery-based transportation requirements. The system uses either the freight unit type from the freight unit building rule, or the default freight unit type defined in customizing.
Note: The freight unit type consists of a four-character identifier. The freight order type, freight booking type, transportation unit type, and freight unit types must be unique across these three business document types. Within the freight unit type, you can define if a freight unit can be deleted or if it must be canceled.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Freight Unit Type Customizing
Settings Related to the Change Controller
You can assign several different settings related to the change controller. These settings impact how TM responds to changes from the ERP system. Additional Strategies
There are a number of additional strategies: •
Creation Strategy: Specifies tasks that the change controller is to perform when creating a freight order, freight booking, and freight unit.
•
Save Strategy: Specifies tasks the change controller is to perform when saving a freight order, freight booking, and freight unit.
•
Delete Strategy: Specifies tasks that the change controller is to perform when a freight order, freight booking, or freight unit is deleted or canceled.
Execution Settings
There are a number of execution settings: •
Execution Track Relevance: Indicator for controlling the tracking of documents. To track certain types of documents, choose 2 (Execution Tracking) or 3 (Execution Tracking with External Event Management). The system sets the initial document execution status to Not Started. If you do not want to track certain types of documents, choose 1 (No Execution Tracking). The system then sets the initial document execution status to Not Relevant.
•
Immediate Processing checkbox.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Event Management Settings
•
Application Object Type: Type of application object to be tracked on the application system necessary for determining event management relevance for an application object. The event manager only processes event messages for these objects.
•
Last Expected Event for Execution of a Document: Last expected event for a document, for example, the unexpected event UnloadEnd.
Default MTr Definition Settings
•
Default MTr for Type: Indicate the default means of transport type
•
Condition for Default MTr
Default Units of Measure
•
Weight
•
Volume
Direct Shipment Options
•
Direct Shipment Option Type: There are three standard options that include no determination of direct shipment options, automatic determination of direct shipment options, and manual determination of direct shipment options.
•
Carrier Selection Settings: Indicates carrier selection settings that are used for determination of direct shipment options.
•
Carrier Selection Conditions: Specifies the condition that the system uses to determine carrier selection settings for direct shipment processes at runtime.
•
Direct Shipment Strategy: Specifies the process controller strategy that can be used to determine the direct shipment options for a freight unit.
Freight Order Determination
•
Freight Order Type: Default freight order type for direct shipment.
•
Freight Order Type Condition: Condition can be created to decide which freight order type is used for direct shipment.
Organizational Unit Determination
•
Default Org Unit: Execution Organization, Purchasing Organization, Execution Group, Purchase Group. These are the organization numbers that are created in Organizational Structures.
•
Consider Organization Unit of User check box: Considers the organizational unit assigned to the user that creates the freight unit in the determination of the organizational unit responsible for the freight unit.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
•
Condition of Determination Rules: Conditions can be created to effect the organizational unit determination.
Additional Settings
•
Track Changes checkbox: Select this box if changes are to be tracked.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 1 Exercise 1 Define Freight Unit Types
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to define freight unit types required for transportation planning. 1. Review the number ranges used in freight order management in Customizing for SAP TM. (In SAP TM, the freight unit is a view of the transportation order. The number range for freight unit and freight orders is maintained as one object.) 2. In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management —>Transportation Management —>Planning —>Freight Unit —*• Define Freight Unit Types. Check and update the freight unit type FU## for the following data: Field
Value
Freight Unit Type
FU##
Description
GR## Freight Unit
Time for Drawing
Draw number when saving document
Number Range Interval
04
Default Change Strategy
DEF_CHACO
Execution Track Relevance
Execution Tracking with External Event Management
Immediate Processing
Enabled
Direct Shipment Option Type
No Determination of Direct Ship ment Options
Weight
US pound
Volume
Cubic meter
Rule for PU/DLV Window
Pick-Up and Delivery as Defined in FWO, FWQ, OTR, or DTR
Text Schema
ERP_DFLT
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 1 Solution 1 Define Freight Unit Types
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to define freight unit types required for transportation planning. 1. Review the number ranges used in freight order management in Customizing for SAP TM. (In SAP TM, the freight unit is a view of the transportation order. The number range for freight unit and freight orders is maintained as one object.) a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management —*• Transportation Management —*■ Freight Order Management —>Define Number Range Intervals for Freight Order Management. b) Execute the activity. c) Choose$g> (Intervals). d) Explore the intervals defined. You can assign any of the intervals to a freight unit type. Note the number ranges assigned and how a number range is assigned in the next step. e) Exit the activity. 2. In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management —>Transportation Management —>Planning —>Freight Unit —► Define Freight Unit Types. Check and update the freight unit type FU## for the following data: Field
Value
Freight Unit Type
FU##
Description
GR## Freight Unit
Time for Drawing
Draw number when saving document
Number Range Interval
04
Default Change Strategy
DEF_CHACO
Execution Track Relevance
Execution Tracking with External Event Management
Immediate Processing
Enabled
Direct Shipment Option Type
No Determination of Direct Ship ment Options
Weight
US pound
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Volume
Cubic meter
Rule for PU/DLV Window
Pick-Up and Delivery as Defined in FWO, FWQ, OTR, or DTR
Text Schema
ERP_DFLT
a) Execute the specified Customizing activity. b) Select the freight unit type FU##. c) Enter the freight unit type and description. d) Enter the data from the table and save your work. e) Exit the Customizing activity.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Freight Unit Building Rules Freight unit building rules are required to plan freight in SAP TM and define how freight units are built. The system determines which freight unit building rule will be taken into account for the business document during planning. Possible input for freight unit building are the following documents: •
Forwarding Orders
•
Order-based Transportation Requirements
•
Delivery-based Transportation Requirements
There are three freight unit building rule determination options, as follows: •
The system checks the condition defined in the business document type (FWO, OTR, DTR). If there is no condition or the condition cannot determine a result, the system moves to the second option.
•
The system checks if a freight unit building rule has been maintained in the business document type (FWO, OTR, DTR). If no freight unit building rule is maintained, the system moves to the third option.
•
The system applies standard settings.
Automatic Freight Unit Creation When creating freight units automatically, the system first groups all business document items within the following parameters:• •
Hard constraints. These include source and destination location, and pick-up and delivery dates.
•
Business document attributes and packaging information
•
Incompatibilities
•
Freight unit building rules
Freight units can be built manually, in a batch job, and automatically upon creation of the predecessor document (FWO, OTR, DTR)..
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Prerequisites for Creating Freight Units
The prerequisites for creating freight units automatically are: 1. A preceding business document exists. 2. You have defined freight unit types in Customizing. Creating Freight Units
The system considers freight units that already exist for these business documents, and creates one or more freight units from these groups. If you define a split quantity and select the checkbox for the item split, the system considers these entries when creating multiple freight units. You can specify an FUB rule when automatically creating freight units. If you do not specify an FUB rule, the system automatically determines the FUB rule. Use strategies to create freight units in accordance with your own requirements. SAP delivers the standard strategy f u b _ a u t o for freight unit building.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
FUBR Specifications
Within the freight unit building rule, a company must specify the critical quantity. This parameter defines the primary unit of measure that allows a line item on a transport requirement to be split into multiple freight units. Besides that, several planning quantities can be defined, for example, weight and volume. Every planning quantity is considered for capacity checks of resources during transportation planning, and every planning quantity is copied to the freight unit. The split quantities define the maximum capacity of a freight unit. The system calculates the freight unit as a multiple of the rounding quantity. If Item Split Allowed is selected, the freight unit splits the item while it is being built, if it is over the split quantity. The process controller strategy allows you use strategies to define the way in which freight units are created in accordance with your requirements. If you maintain an equipment type in the freight unit building rule, the capacity of the equipment is considered during freight unit building and the items consolidated into one freight unit are loaded into the equipment.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Freight Unit Building Rule Strategy Consolidate Per Item FU
Sales
Order/OTR
PRODTM-OO
10 PRODTM-OO 50pc 1500 kg 20 PRODTM-01 100 pc 3000 kg 30 PRODTM-02 200 pc 6000 kg
PRODTM-01 FU
PRODTM-02 Figure 7: Rule Strategy Consolidate per Item (Do not Consolidate)
One freight unit building rule strategy is to consolidate per item. This strategy creates separate freight units for each item in the transportation requirement. Consolidate per Request (Compatible Parts)
Sales
Order/OTR
10 PRODTM-OO 50 pc 1500 kg 20 PRODTM-01 100 pc 3000 kg 30 PRODTM-02 200 pc 6000 kg
—
►
PRODTM-02 Figure 8: Rule Strategy: Consolidate per Request (Compatible Parts)
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Another freight unit building rule strategy is to consolidate per request for compatible parts. The system groups all the items of a business to form a freight unit. It is assumed that compatibility rules are used to group similar items.
Consolidate as Much as Possible
Sales O rd e r/O T R 10 PRODTM-OO 50pc 1500 kg
F U - A 001
Sales O rd e r/O T R 10 PRODTM-Ol 100 pc 3000 kg
\1
10 PRODTM-OO
___________
20 PRODTM-Ol 30 PRODTM-02
Sales O rd e r/O T R 10 PRODTM-02 200 pc 6000 kg
\ l ______ Figure 9: Rule Strategy Consolidate as Much as Possible
Another freight unit building rule strategy is to consolidate as much as possible. This strategy can only be used with interactive FU creation from POWL or via a batch report. It consolidates several transportation requirements into one freight unit, if there are no other reasons for a split.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Apply Freight Unit Building Rules
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to define and apply freight unit building rules required for transportation planning.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Define Freight Unit Types.
1. In NWBC, create a freight unit building rule. Allow an item split. Use the following data: Field
Value
Freight Unit Building Rule
FBR##
Description
GR## FreightUnit Building Rule
Document Type
FU##
Freight Unit Building Strategy
Consolidate per Item
Critical Quantity
Gross Weight
Item Split Allowed
Enabled
Planning Quantity for Freight Unit Building
Gross Weight
Unit of Measure of Split Quantity
LB
Split Quantity
45000
Process Controller Strategy
FUB_AUTO
2. In Customizing for SAP TM, assign your new freight unit building rule FBR## to your new transportation requirement type TR##.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Apply Freight Unit Building Rules
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to define and apply freight unit building rules required for transportation planning.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Define Freight Unit Types.
1. In NWBC, create a freight unit building rule. Allow an item split. Use the following data: Field
Value
Freight Unit Building Rule
FBR##
Description
GR## FreightUnit Building Rule
Document Type
FU##
Freight Unit Building Strategy
Consolidate per Item
Critical Quantity
Gross Weight
Item Split Allowed
Enabled
Planning Quantity for Freight Unit Building
Gross Weight
Unit of Measure of Split Quantity
LB
Split Quantity
45000
Process Controller Strategy
FUB_AUTO
a) In NWBC, choose Application Administration —> Planning —> General Settings —> Freight Unit Building Rule —*• Create Freight Unit Building Rule. b) Select the General Data tab. c) Enter the data from the table. d) Select the Advanced Settings tab. e) Enter the data from the table.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
f) Save your new freight unit building rule. 2. In Customizing for SAP TM, assign your new freight unit building rule FBR## to your new transportation requirement type TR##. a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management —> Transportation Management —> Integration —> ERP Logistics Integration —>Order- Based Transportation Requirement —► Define Order -Based Transportation Requirement Types. b) Choose
Execute.
c) Select your new TR## and choose
Details.
d) Enter the freight unit building rule FBR## in the Freight Unit Building Rule field. e) Enable automatic freight unit building by selecting the corresponding checkbox. f) Save your data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Create Freight Units
Business Example
As part of the transportation planning and execution process in your company, you need to be able to generate freight units, both from OTRs in a worklist, and using automatic freight unit creation.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Apply Freight Unit Building Rules. Create a Freight Unit Using Automatic Freight Unit Creation
1. In SAP ERP, create a new sales order to generate a new transportation requirement in SAP TM. Use the following data: Field
Value
Order Type
ZT##
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to Party
CustOO-17
PO Number
GR##_201
Material
PRODTM-OO
Quantity
50
2. Identify the resulting transportation requirement in SAP TM, using the POWL. 3. What is the life cycle status of the transportation requirement?
4. Open the transportation requirement to review the document flow. 5. Open the new freight unit and review the data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
7. Which freight unit building rule was used?
Change Customizing to Prevent Automatic Freight Unit Building
1. Remove the flag automatic freight unit building from OTR type TR## Create a Freight Unit from the Personal Object Worklist (POWL)
1. In SAP ERP, create a new sales order to generate a new transportation requirement in SAP TM. Use the following data: Field
Value
Order Type
ZT##
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to Party
Cust00-17
PO Number
GR##_201
Material
PRODTM-OO
Quantity
50
2. In SAP TM, create freight units directly using the POWL. 3. What is the new life cycle status of the transportation requirement?
4. Open the transportation requirement to review the document flow. 5. Open the newly created freight unit and review the data. 6. Which document type(freight unit type) was used?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
7. Which freight unit building rule was used?
8. Review the item data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Create Freight Units
Business Example
As part of the transportation planning and execution process in your company, you need to be able to generate freight units, both from OTRs in a worklist, and using automatic freight unit creation.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Apply Freight Unit Building Rules. Create a Freight Unit Using Automatic Freight Unit Creation
1. In SAP ERP, create a new sales order to generate a new transportation requirement in SAP TM. Use the following data: Field
Value
Order Type
ZT##
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to Party
CustOO-17
PO Number
GR##_201
Material
PRODTM-OO
Quantity
50
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, start transaction vaoi,or choose Logistics —*• Sales and Distribution —> Sales —> Order. b) On the initial screen, enter the relevant data from the table and then press ENTER. c) On the overview screen, enter the remaining data from the table and press ENTER. d) Save your work and make a note of the sales order number:________________ 2. Identify the resulting transportation requirement in SAP TM, using the POWL.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
a) In NWBC, choose ERP Logistics Integration —> Worklist —*■ Overview Transport Requirements. b) Choose Refresh at the top of your worklist. c) Locate the sales order number you recorded. 3. What is the life cycle status of the transportation requirement? In Planning._________________________________________________________________ 4. Open the transportation requirement to review the document flow. a) Click the document number to open the transportation requirement. b) Open the Document Flow tab. c) Verify that a freight unit has been created. 5. Open the new freight unit and review the data. a) In the document flow, click the freight unit number. b) On the General Data tab, review the locations, dates, and weight. c) Review the Label and verify that it corresponds to the sales order number. 6. Which document type (freight unit type) was used? FU##______________________________________________________________________ 7. Which freight unit building rule was used? FBR##_____________________________________________________________________ Change Customizing to Prevent Automatic Freight Unit Building
1. Remove the flag automatic freight unit building from OTR type TR## a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management —> Transportation Management —> Integration —► ERP Logistics Integration —> Order- Based Transportation Requirement —> Define Order -Based Transportation Requirement Types. b) Double-click on OTR type TR##. c) Remove the flag automatic freight unit building. d) Choose Save. Create a Freight Unit from the Personal Object Worklist (POWL)
1. In SAP ERP, create a new sales order to generate a new transportation requirement in SAP TM. Use the following data: Field
Value
Order Type
ZT##
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to Party
Cust00-17
PO Number
GR##_201
Material
PRODTM-OO
Quantity
50
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, start transaction vaoi,or choose Logistics Distribution —> Sales —> Order.
— *■
Sales and
b) On the initial screen, enter the relevant data from the table and then press ENTER. c) On the overview screen, enter the remaining data from the table and press ENTER. d) Save your work and make a note of the sales order number:_________________ 2. In SAP TM, create freight units directly using the POWL. a) In NWBC, choose ERP Logistics Integration —► Worklist —> Overview Transportation Requirements. b) Identify your previously created transportation requirement and verify that the life cycle status is New. c) Select your transportation requirement and choose Create Freight Units. 3. What is the new life cycle status of the transportation requirement? In Planning__________________________________________________________________ 4. Open the transportation requirement to review the document flow. a) Click the document number to open the transportation requirement. b) Open the Document Flow tab. c) Verify that a freight unit has been created. 5. Open the newly created freight unit and review the data. a) In the Document Flow tab, click the freight unit number. b) On the General Data tab, review the locations, dates, and weight. c) Review the Label and verify that it corresponds to the sales order number.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
6. Which document type(freight unit type) was used? FU##________________________________________________________ 7. Which freight unit building rule was used? FBR##_______________________________________________________ 8. Review the item data. a) On the Items tab, scroll to the right to review the assigned requirement. b) Select the item and review the product details.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Define freight unit types
•
Create freight units and freight unit building rules
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Building Packages
LESSON OVERVIEW This lesson examines package building in the SAP Transportation Management (TM) planning process. At the end of the lesson, you will be able to create freight units with packages. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Create freight units with packages
Package Building Overview
New rule-based package building engine (SCMB) • Builds product pallets and mixed pallets (layered) • Considers product master data • Considers product to package & equipment type assignment • Considers package building profile Integrated into freight unit building • Creates package items in freight unit • Can also create freight orders, trailer units, railcar units, container units
Figure 10: Package Building Overview
Orders are placed on products which, during the real process, are packaged to create packages and pallets (HUs, TUs, main cargo items, and so on). Packaging is a warehouse process. Warehouse specific information can influence the result (for example, pick sequence). For the end-to-end process, the package information is required long before the warehouse is reached. The goal for SAP TM is to close the gap between orders based on products and the load planning happening for packages and pallets, as well as to enable a package building function that
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
considers warehouse information. Therefore, readily available packaging components and product master data packaging-specific definitions are reused. Package Building in the SAP Transport M anagem ent (T M ) Planning Process
Package Building is inserted into the overall planning process at the freight unit building step. It allows products to be combined into packages. These packages (within freight units) are later used in subsequent planning steps (manual and optimizer planning (VSR) to create freight orders and subsequent load planning).
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Package Building P aram eters
Package Type Determination (Business Partner, Location...) Maximum Package Height, Package Type (Unit of Measure) Item Split Factor Determination
Package Building
Alternative Quantities for Packages and Layers MD M aterial/ Product
t ERP
Figure 12: Parameters for Package Building
Package building is defined by the package building profile. This enables certain process steps to be switched on or off, specific behavior to be defined (especially when building mixed packages), and also offers default attributes that can be overwritten by product specific settings. The following are examples of parameters: Process Products by Layer This parameter can turn off the creation of full product packages. By default, this is very seldom required, but gives a mixed package building logic more freedom. For example, a certain customer always requires a specific product combination (even when ordering a high quantity), this can then be implemented in an enhancement receiving a full set of products. Keep Layers Together When building mixed packages, the parameter controls of a product can be split over multiple mixed packages. In some situations, this might result in a better and more efficient plan. However, in more warehouse driven scenarios, it might not be efficient to process a product twice for two packages. Therefore, it can be turned off.
Note: This behavior can be defined more specifically on a product or business partner level. Ignore Product Height When consolidating leftover products that are not filling a complete package, nor a complete product layer, the system tries to build mixed layers combining products with the same
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
height. This step can be skipped if the product height is not important. As a result, all of the leftover product quantities can be combined directly resulting in standard non-stackable layers. The package building profile is assigned to the freight unit building rule. In addition, for freight unit building you can define the maximum number of package items that can be put into a single freight unit. Product and Package Type Assignm ent
Package Master Data
The most important definitions on package material level are as follows: Base Unit of Measure Points to the product master data conversion rules (if not overwritten in the product and package type assignment). Weight, Length, Width, and Height of the Package Material Considered when calculating the weight and dimension of the final package containing products. Maximum Weight of the Package Package weight + product weight. This can be reduced in the product package type assignment. Maximum Height of the Package Package height + product height. This can be reduced in the product package type assignment. Closed Package The height is fixed, even if the package is not full. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Product Master Data
The following can be defined at product level, under alternative units of measure: Single product item attributes like weight, length, width, and height These are considered during package attribute determination and mixed package building. How many pieces of a product fit into a full package This is defined by the package unit of measure and includes a definition of how high such a package is. How many pieces fit into a full product layer This is defined by layer unit of measure.
Note: In the product and package type assignment you can specify the layer unit of measure to be used.
Product and Package Type Assignment
The product and package type assignment is a new master data transaction that defines, for each product in the package builder, which package it goes into or onto. To reduce the effort when maintaining those definitions, it is possible to work with generic patterns. The definition can be dependent on the product, business partner, and location. For example, product A is usually delivered with an EU pallet stacked up to 1.5 meters (first entry). However, when delivering this product to customer X from your warehouse Y, you use a different pallet type containing product A stacked up to 1.3 meters, because the customer can only handle pallets up to this height (second entry as exception). The package builder will always prefer the most specific entry. It will start to search for an entry matching all 3 key fields exactly. If nothing is found, it will score all other keys in the following manner: •
How many keys match exactly?
•
How many keys match by pattern?
•
How many keys are initial?
It will then select the key with the highest score.
Note: The package builder will always only pick one entry, rather than combining two.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Package Building S elected Features Layer Types • Define number of product pieces inside layer type • Define number of layers in package type
Package Types
• Consider different package types (length, width, height, weight) • Required package type and allowed maximum height may depend on product & customer
Figure 14: Selected Features of Package Building
The product and package type assignment defines the target package type. One option is to set the package material. When doing so, the base unit of measure of the package, the dimensions, and the weight are all considered. The second option is to set the package unit of measure. This points directly to the product-alternative units of measure for the conversion rules, but no package attributes are considered. When set in combination with the package material, it can overrule the base unit of measure of this package. The third option is to set the definition of the equipment group and type. In SAP TM, this enables the creation of container, trailer, or railcar units. It does not affect the logic, but the package unit of measure must also be defined. Furthermore, the definition allows specific limits to be set regarding the weight and height that the package builder will consider when packing the product. It is possible to set generally valid limits on the package material (i.e. product master data). For example, you can only stack a EU pallet up to 1.8 meters and put 900 kg on it. In the product and package type assignment, you can lower the specific product, customer, and location limits. Stacked Packages
•
Built package item contains data needed for load planning (length, width, height, weight).
•
Pack material required -
One per pallet vs.
-
One below each product layer in a package
Finally, there are flags to steer the process when creating mixed packages and pallets. The layer unit of measure field points to the product master data defintion required to create a mixed package (how many pieces fit into a product layer). In addition, you can define whether a product can be split over multiple mixed packages, if additional packing material is required, and how mixed product layers shall be created. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Package Building Logic Mixed Package Building (phase 2)
Product Package Building (phase 1)
Mixed Pallets
Product Pallets Full
aa a ^
Full
Incomplete
Incomplete
/ _____ / 100 pieces 30 pieces
130 pieces Product A
/
\
60 pieces
/
10 pieces 10 pieces
10 pieces
70 pieces Product B
mm
v r
/
13 pieces Product C
Result: 7 pallets
Result: 6 pallets
Figure 15: Logic of Package Building
Step 1 Full package building. Step 2 Mixed package building takes the incomplete product pallets as input and combines them into mixed pallets, in order to minimize the total number of pallets. Mixed Package Building (Phase 2 )
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Mixed Package Building based on Full Product Layers
•
Split incomplete Product Packages into Product Layers
•
Combine Layers to build Mixed Packages and consider: -
Maximum package height (customer specific)
-
Product compatibility and stacking rules
-
Layer compatibility (incomplete on top)
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 1 Exercise 4 Create Freight Units with Packages
Business Example Product Pallet Building Product Pallets
Freight Unit Building Rule
PB1 ## 90 pieces
1 Freight Unit 180 pieces PB PROD A PB2 30 pieces
□
m
60 pieces PB PROD B
m 2 Freight Units
Result: 4 pallets in total
Figure 17: Create Freight Units with Packages
In this scenario you create a forwarding order with multiple product items. The goal is to put these product items onto pallets by minimizing the number of pallets considering constraints like pallet attributes, product stacking rules, and customer specific requirements. For product A the freight unit Building rule is set up the way that 1 freight unit can consist of a maximum of 10 pallets. For product B the freight unit building rule is set up the way that for each pallet a separate freight unit is created.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Create Freight Units. Create a Package Building Profile for Package Building
1.
Create a package building profile that allows the creation of pallets during freight unit building.
Set Up Forwarding Order Management for Package Building
1. Create two freight unit building rules that allow the creation of packages for each forwarding order item. The first FUBR PB1_## allows multiple packages (pallets) in one freight unit, whereas the second FUBR PB2_## creates one freight unit for each package.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
2. Create a condition PB_FUBR_COND_## to determine the freight unit building rule during freight unit creation. This freight unit building rule is determined based on the product maintained in the forwarding order item. 3. Create a forwarding order type (PB##) by copying forwarding order type FWOX, and assign the freight unit building rule condition (PB_FUBR_COND_##). Additional System Set Up for Package Building
1. Check Product Package Type Assignment. Here, each product is assigned to a specific package type (pallet). 2. To which package are products PB_PROD_A and PB_PROD_B assigned?
3. What is the maximum height of a package of product PB_PROD_A?
4. Review the master data of product PB_PROD_A. How many pieces of product PB_PROD_A can be consolidated into 1 layer (LY1)?
How many pieces of product PB_PROD_B can be consolidated into one package (PL1)?
What is the length, width, and height of one piece?
What is the height of one layer?
Create a Forwarding Order for Package Building
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
1. Create a forwarding order to test the creation of packages during freight unit building. Use the data from the table to create the forwarding order: Field
Value
Forwarding Order Type
PB##
Movement Type
T2C
Ordering Party
CUST00-25
Shipper
SP3100
Consignee
CUST00-25
Source Location
SP3100
Pick-Up Date
Today + 3 workdays
Destination Location
CUST00-25
Delivery Date
Today + 5 workdays
2. On Item Level, choose Insert Product and make the following entries: Field
Value
Item Type
PRD
Product
PB_PROD_A
Quantity
180
Quantity Unit of Measure
PC
3. On Item Level, choose Insert Product and make the following entries: Field
Value
Item Type
PRD
Product
PB_PROD_B
Quantity
60
Quantity Unit of Measure
PC
4. Check the creation of all freight units belonging to your forwarding order. How many freight units have been created?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
5. Note down all freight unit document numbers.
6. Identify the freight unit created for PB_PROD_A. Which freight unit building rule has been used for its creation?
How many packages have been created?
7. Identify the freight units created for PB_PROD_B. Which freight unit building rule has been used for their creation?
How many packages have been created in each freight unit?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 1 Solution 4 Create Freight Units with Packages
Business Example Product Pallet Building Product Pallets
Freight Unit Building Rule
PB1_## 1 Freight Unit 180 pieces PB PROD A PB2_##
□
2 Freight Units
m
60 pieces PB PROD B
Result: 4 pallets in total
Figure 17: Create Freight Units with Packages
In this scenario you create a forwarding order with multiple product items. The goal is to put these product items onto pallets by minimizing the number of pallets considering constraints like pallet attributes, product stacking rules, and customer specific requirements. For product A the freight unit Building rule is set up the way that 1 freight unit can consist of a maximum of 10 pallets. For product B the freight unit building rule is set up the way that for each pallet a separate freight unit is created.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Create Freight Units. Create a Package Building Profile for Package Building
1. Create a package building profile that allows the creation of pallets during freight unit building. a) In Customizing, go to SAP Transportation M anagem ent^ SCM Basis —» Pack —» Package Building —> Define Package Building Profile. b) Choose New Entries and make the following settings:
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Profile
PB##
Description
TM200 Package Building Grp # #
Keep Layers Together
Check
c) Choose Save. Set Up Forwarding Order Management for Package Building
1. Create two freight unit building rules that allow the creation of packages for each forwarding order item. The first FUBR PB1_## allows multiple packages (pallets) in one freight unit, whereas the second FUBR PB2_## creates one freight unit for each package. a) In NWBC, goto Application Administration —► Planning—> General Settings —> Freight Unit Building Rule —> Create Freight Unit Building Rule. b) Enter the following data for FUBR 1: Field
Value
Freight Unit Building Rule
PB1_##
Description
TM200 PB FUBR1 # #
Document Type (Freight Unit Type)
PBFU
Critical Quantity
Gross Weight
Planning Quantity for Freight Unit Building
Gross Weight
Unit of Measure of Split Quantity
LB
Rounding Quantity
1
c) Go to tab Advanced Settings and enter the following data: Field
Value
Package Builder Profile ID
PB##
Maximum Number of Packages per FU
10 (in order to create 1 FU for every 10 pal lets)
d) Save your freight unit building rule. e) In NWBC, goto Application Administration —► Planning—> General Settings —> Freight Unit Building Rule —> Create Freight Unit Building Rule. f) Enter the following data: Field
Value
Freight Unit Building Rule
PB2_##
Description
TM200 PB FUBR2 ##
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Document Type (Freight Unit Type)
PBFU
Critical Quantity
Gross Weight
Planning Quantity for Freight Unit Building
Gross Weight
Unit of Measure of Split Quantity
LB
Rounding Quantity
1
g) Go to the Advanced Settings and enter the following data: Field
Value
Package Builder Profile ID
PB##
Maximum Number of Packages per FU
1 (in order to create 1 FU per pallet)
h) Save your freight unit building rule. 2. Create a condition PB_FUBR_COND_## to determine the freight unit building rule during freight unit creation. This freight unit building rule is determined based on the product maintained in the forwarding order item. a) In NWBC, goto Application Administration —» General Settings —*■ Conditions—> Create Condition. b) Enter the following data: Field
Value
Condition
PB_FUBR_COND_##
Description
TM200 PB FUBR Cond ##
Condition Type
/SCMTMS/FUBR
Origin of Condition
Condition based on BRFplus Decision Table
c) Choose Continue. d) Go to Data Access Definition. e) Delete both default data access definitions and create the following data access definitions: Field
Value
Name of BO Used in Condition
/SCMTMS/TRQ
Name of BO Node Used in Condition
ITEM
Name of the Field of the BO Node
PRODUCTJD
Filter Definition for Data Access Definition
ITEM_CAT
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Key Field Value for BO Node Identif.
PRD
f) Go back to the Decision Table and maintain it in the following way: Field
Value
Product
FUB Rule
PB_PROD_A
PB1_##
PB_PROD_B
PB2_##
g) Save the condition. 3. Create a forwarding order type (PB##) by copying forwarding order type FWOX, and assign the freight unit building rule condition (PB_FUBR_COND_##). a) In Customizing, go to SAP Transportation Management —> Transportation Management —*• Forwarding Order Management —> Forwarding Order —> Define Forwarding Order Types. b) Highlight Forwarding Order Type FWOX. c) Choose Copy. d) Enter the following data:_____________________________________________________ Field
Value
Forwarding Order Type
PB##
Description
Forwarding Order Type (TM200) Group # #
FU Building Rule Condition
PB_FUBR_COND_##
e) Save your entries. Additional System Set Up for Package Building
1. Check Product Package Type Assignment. Here, each product is assigned to a specific package type (pallet). a) In NWBC, go to Master Data —» General—> Define Product Package Assignment. 2. To which package are products PB_PROD_A and PB_PROD_B assigned? PB_EUROPAL__________________________________________________________ 3. What is the maximum height of a package of product PB_PROD_A? 1,644m________________________________________________________________ 4. Review the master data of product PB_PROD_A.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
How many pieces of product PB_PROD_A can be consolidated into 1 layer (LY1)? On the Unit of Meas. tab: 15 How many pieces of product PB_PROD_B can be consolidated into one package (PL1)? On the Unit of Meas. tab: 90 What is the length, width, and height of one piece? On the Unit of Meas. tab: length: 30 mm, width: 20 mm, height: 25 mm What is the height of one layer? On the Unit of Meas. tab: height: 25 mm_________________________ a) In NWBC, go to Master Data —► General —» Define Product. b) Enter product PB_PROD_A and select Global Data. c) Choose Display. Create a Forwarding Order for Package Building
1. Create a forwarding order to test the creation of packages during freight unit building. Use the data from the table to create the forwarding order: Field
Value
Forwarding Order Type
PB##
Movement Type
T2C
Ordering Party
CUSTOO-25
Shipper
SP3100
Consignee
CUSTOO-25
Source Location
SP3100
Pick-Up Date
Today + 3 workdays
Destination Location
CUSTOO-25
Delivery Date
Today + 5 workdays
a) In NWBC, goto Forwarding Order Management —► Forwarding Order —> Create Forwarding Order.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
b) On the initial screen, enter the following data and continue: Field
Value
Forwarding Order Type
PB##
Movement Type
T2C
c) Change to Fast Order Entry (Land) view and enter the data from the table: Field
Value
Ordering Party
CUST00-25
Shipper
SP3100
Consignee
CUST00-25
Source Location
SP3100
Pick-Up Date
Today + 3 workdays
Destination Location
CUST00-25
Delivery Date
Today + 5 workdays
2. On Item Level, choose Insert Product and make the following entries: Field
Value
Item Type
PRD
Product
PB_PROD_A
Quantity
180
Quantity Unit of Measure
PC
3. On Item Level, choose Insert Product and make the following entries: Field
Value
Item Type
PRD
Product
PB_PROD_B
Quantity
60
Quantity Unit of Measure
PC
a) Choose Enter. b) Save the forwarding order.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
c) Note down the forwarding order number.
4. Check the creation of all freight units belonging to your forwarding order. How many freight units have been created? 3 freight units have been created._____________________________________________ a) In NWBC, goto Forwarding Order Management —> Forwarding Order —> Display Forwarding Order. b) Enter your forwarding order document number. c) Open the Document Flow tab. 5. Note down all freight unit document numbers.
6. Identify the freight unit created for PB_PROD_A. Which freight unit building rule has been used for its creation? PB1_## How many packages have been created? 2 packages with 1 palette and 90 PC each.__________________ 7. Identify the freight units created for PB_PROD_B. Which freight unit building rule has been used for their creation? PB2 ## How many packages have been created in each freight unit? 1 package with 1 palette and 30 PC each.________________
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Create freight units with packages
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Learning Assessment
1. Which settings can be maintained in freight unit type Customizing? Choose the correct answers. | A Change Controller Settings B Pickup/Delivery Settings | C Execution Settings D Dangerous Goods Settings 2. A freight unit can only be assigned to a single freight order or freight booking. Determine whether this statement is true or false. | True False 3. Which of the following are reasons for an automatic freight unit split during freight unit building, using the default freight unit building strategy? Choose the correct answers. | A Vehicle resource capacities B Non-unique source or destination locations C Split rules and quantities in the freight unit building rule D Incompatibilities
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which settings can be maintained in freight unit type Customizing? Choose the correct answers. |~xj A Change Controller Settings |~xj
B Pickup/Delivery Settings
|~xj C Execution Settings |~xj
D Dangerous Goods Settings
2. A freight unit can only be assigned to a single freight order or freight booking. Determine whether this statement is true or false. | True \x \ False Correct. A freight unit could be assigned to a freight order for pre-carriage and a freight booking for main carriage, for example. 3. Which of the following are reasons for an automatic freight unit split during freight unit building, using the default freight unit building strategy? Choose the correct answers. | A Vehicle resource capacities |~xj
B Non-unique source or destination locations
|~xj C Split rules and quantities in the freight unit building rule |~xj
D Incompatibilities
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
UNIT 2
Transportation Planning
Lesson 1
Defining the Transportation Planning Process
52
Lesson 2
Evaluating Freight Units Exercise 5: Examine a Freight Unit
58 61
Lesson 3
Creating Freight Orders for Shipping Exercise 6: Create a Freight Order
69 75
UNIT OBJECTIVES
•
Identify the business process and documentation required for transportation planning
•
Examine freight unit management of individual shipping requirements
•
Create freight orders
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Defining the Transportation Planning Process
LESSON OVERVIEW Your business receives orders for the products it manufactures and then ships these products to the end customer. SAP TM has the capability to perform advance planning to increase your company’s service level and increase profitability.
In this lesson, you examine the planning capabilities of SAP TM. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Identify the business process and documentation required for transportation planning
Reasons for Transportation Planning The goal of SAP Transportation Planning (TM) is to enable customers to either manually or automatically plan and optimize their transportation requests. This includes the ability to perform order consolidation, where a company can group orders with the same ship-from and ship-to locations for more efficient transportation quantities. If multiple orders are being shipped within a predefined transportation zone, your company can try to efficiently schedule and route the multiple orders, and chose the appropriate carrier. The planning and selection can be determined using the most cost effective and timely route from source to destination while considering realworld constraints, costs, and penalties. The optimizer is capable of making multi-modal decisions such as sea, air, truck, train, and any combination thereof. The SAP TM planning function can also perform multi-pickup and stop options. Within the optimization algorithm is the ability to utilize the appropriate resources in terms of availability and capacity. The optimizer can consider incompatibility rules to restrict how freight orders are built, for example, modeling material-specific transport requirements (cooled products). In addition, carrier selection allows your company to determine the right combination of carrier assignments based on cost, equipment availability, priority, and business share goals. Order Consolidation
Order consolidation is the grouping of orders with the same ship-from and ship-to locations to create more efficient shipment quantities. The result of order consolidation is that one or more freight units are combined into one freight order. A freight unit is a business object representing the smallest possible transportation unit. Business examples of order consolidation are multiple orders that have been received over time and can be planned to be shipped together. This can be at individual line item level. Customers who make-to-order, and do not ship complete orders to their customers, may consolidate line items from multiple orders as they are produced and as their delivery-due lists are created.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Routing and Scheduling
The figure Routing, Scheduling and Carrier Selection outlines the process of routing and scheduling in the following way: a freight unit X is first routed using the transportation planning function, for example, a transportation proposal. Based on this routing, three stages are created for freight unit X, as follows: •
A stage for US road pick-up transport
•
A stage for the ocean voyage
•
A stage for EU road delivery transport
Up to a certain point, these stages are planned independently of each other because different (local) planners may be responsible for scheduling each of the three stages. A freight order is created as a result of this stage. Finally, carriers are selected based on specific criteria. This is described as a three-step process but a planner can decide whether to perform planning and carrier selection in two steps or three. It is also possible for the SAP TM optimization function to plan all three steps in one run - this planning strategy is called one step optimization. Process Steps
The steps involved in the process, whether one, two or three step can be described as follows: •
Three step 1. Determine routing (transportation proposal) 2. Vehicle scheduling and routing to create a freight order 3. Carrier selection
•
Two step
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
1. Vehicle scheduling and routing to create a freight order 2. Carrier selection •
One step 1. One-step optimization determines the route and plan, creates a freight order and selects a carrier
Manual and Automatic Transportation Planning
Transportation planning activities in SAP TM can be performed manually and automatically, as well as interactively and in the background. For interactive planning, the central planning Ul is the transportation cockpit. Both manual and automatic planning activities are performed there based on planning strategies (for example, one-step optimization). Planning Constraints
SAP TM can consider numerous constraints during planning. Which ones are relevant and should be used in a specific scenario largely depends on the scenario itself. Constraints can have physical root causes, such as vehicle capacity or handling capabilities for loading and unloading at certain facilities. On the other hand, constraints can have process-related root causes. For example, a delivery tour should have a maximum of 25 drops in a day. This is a maximum that will fit in a driver’s daily schedule, assuming he has to unload at the door and do some paperwork for each customer drop. Assets, Facilities, Resources and Times
There are a number of assets, facilities, resources, and times: •
Vehicle capacity
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
•
Vehicle combinations (truck and trailer)
•
Compartments
•
Depot locations
•
Handling resources, opening hours (calendars and shift patterns)
•
Schedules
•
Incompatibilities — constraints by design
Process and Execution Constraints
There are a number of process and execution constraints: •
Vehicle load level
•
Decreasing capacities
•
Max number of transshipment locations
•
Max limits on distance, duration, or stopovers
•
Pick-up and deliver time windows
•
Min and max storage time at hub — cross-docking changeover
•
Loading and unloading durations
•
Scheduling constraints
Transportation Planning Document Structure Planning relies on the following three distinct pillars: •
Master Data Master data objects such as the transportation network (locations, transshipment hierarchies, transportation zones and transportation zone hierarchies, and transportation lanes) and resources are the basis for any planning activities in SAP TM.
•
Selection Profiles Selection profiles specify what should be planned in a certain scenario. For example, selection profiles specify the geography for which a transportation plan shall be created. This could be, for example, all freight units to be transported within California.
•
Planning Profiles Planning profiles specify the “ how" of the process. For example, a planner may only be allowed to schedule standard trucks and not a helicopter for emergency transports. This information dictates how the actual transportation is to be carried out. In the planning profiles, you can specify the resources to use and at what cost.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Planning Profiles
Planning Profile
I
Selection Profiles
Master Data
Geographical Selection Attributes ■ Using any attribute of the locations or zones for the selection of transportation requirements
Transportation Network / Geography a Transportation zones
■ Planning strategy ■ Planning horizon
a Transportation lanes a Transshipment locations
Capacity Selection ■ Vehicles, trailers a Freight bookings
Resources a Mean of transport a Vehicles, vehicle combinations
a Schedules Planning Cost Settings a Penalty costs
i Considering partiallyplanned transportation requirements (freight units) Time-Related Selection Attributes
Constraints
Optimizer Settings
a Operating times a Handling Resources
a Proposal settings a Runtime a Maximum number of
■ Pick-up and delivery time windows Additional Selection Attributes
transshipment locations Incompatibilities
i Additional selection attributes i Additional flexible filters
Figure 20: SAP TM Planning
Transportation Planning Document Flow SAP ERP
,
1
Sales Order / Purchase Order
Delivery
1
:------------4 -----------1
Order-based Transportation Requirement
Delivery-based Transportation Requirement
Forwarding Quotation Forwarding Order
Execution / Subcontr.
Charges / Settlement
Freight Settlement Document
S
Forwarding Settlement Document
Rate Table
Figure 21: SAP TM Document Flow (End-to-End)
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
The standard planning process begins with creating freight units out of transportation requests. Any of the following may prompt the creation of a freight unit: •
Forwarding Order (FWO)
•
Order-based Transportation Requirement (OTR)
•
Delivery-based Transportation Requirement (DTR)
Short-cut Process Flow
Once created, freight units are used by manual or automatic planning activities to build freight orders, which can subsequently be used for carrier selection or tendering processes. The purpose of the short-cut process is to skip any planning activities, because these may not be required in certain scenarios. For example, if the sales orders that are received by a company already state the required truck size, the freight order could be created directly from the transportation requirement (in this example, an OTR). Technically, this is done during freight unit building by selecting a freight order type instead of a freight unit type.*•
Standard process flow Order Management
Planning
FU
[= £ ►
FO
< =
Execution / Subcontracting
1P Shortcut process flow (no freight units, no planning) Order Management
P>
FO < =
Execution / Subcontracting
Figure 22: Planning View on the Business Objects
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Identify the business process and documentation required for transportation planning
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 2 Lesson 2 Evaluating Freight Units
LESSON OVERVIEW This lesson examines the role of freight units. You explore how freight units are created from transportation requirements such as forwarding orders or order and delivery based transportation requirements. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Examine freight unit management of individual shipping requirements
Freight Units in Planning
Standard order
Header
Sold-to party Ship-to party
Item 1
Item Material
2387 4876 Quantity
Schedule line 1 10
1400-100
20 PC
Nov 01
20 PC
1400-200
50 PC
1
Nov 01
20 PC
2
Jan 01
30 PC
1
Item 2 Schedule line 1 Schedule line 2
20
Figure 23: Purpose of Freight Units
A sales order originating in SAP ERP will usually comprise a number of different items with different schedule lines. This may be because the customer requires the goods at different points in time, or because of some other specific issue of compatibility or timing. For example, let's assume a retailer orders ice-cream and milk in bulk quantities from its supplying dairy. Because of different temperature requirements, these cannot be shipped in the same truck. Furthermore, if the quantities (by schedule line) exceed a truck capacity, the schedule lines may need to be split because of capacity considerations. A freight unit is an object in SAP TM that groups items that are transported together. Freight units can be created per item and schedule line, but freight units can also group (consolidate) different items if these have similar characteristics with For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
respect to their transportation options. The same applies to forwarding orders and deliverybased transportation requirements (DTRs). Freight Unit Creation
The most convenient way to create freight units is to create them automatically, based on their predecessor document (FWO, OTR, DTR). Freight units can also be created using a background report, and the creation of freight units can be manually triggered from worklists. If it arises during planning that a freight unit has to be adapted (split or merged, for example), this can be done manually in the transportation cockpit. Freight Units in Planning
As a result of integration with SAP ERP (or another enterprise resource planning system), one or more freight units are generated for each transportation requirement being planned in SAP TM. A freight unit may therefore be described as a collection of goods that are transported together across the entire transportation chain. A freight unit can include transportation constraints that are referenced during transportation planning. A freight unit can be used to merge items from the following business documents that are to be transported together - FWO, OTR, DTR. Freight units are built on the foundation provided by business document data and freight unit building rules. The most important settings for the freight unit are defined in the freight unit type. The freight unit type allows for settings to be applied in the following areas: •
Customizing options
•
Controller maintenance
•
Checks in relation to creating, saving and deleting
•
Tracking settings
•
Organizational unit determination
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
•
Direct shipment process
•
Default values
•
Pick-up and delivery window calculation
Freight unit type determination is based on freight unit building rules applied in the creation of freight units and on specified conditions.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 2 Exercise 5 Examine a Freight Unit
Business Example
As a manufacturer, you require a planning tool that supports your diverse requirements in relation to shipping various products. You need to investigate how SAP TM builds and plans freight units, as well as learn about the necessary tools to support planning. 1. Create a sales order for 50 pieces of product PRODTM-OO, for customer CUSTOO-25, with reference PO number TM200_00. Use the following organizational data: Field
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Org
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
2. Take note of the sales order number.
3. Review the order based transportation requirement in SAP TM. What is the OTR-number that corresponds to your sales order? Which document type has been used for your OTR? Write down the document number of your OTR.
4. Navigate into the OTR and review the information. What is the lifecycle status?
5. What is the consumption status?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
6. What is the source location of product PRODTM-OO?
7. Is the source location visible on the Locations and Dates/Times tab in the Source screen area? Why not?
8. Has a freight unit been created? If yes, note the freight unit number.
9. What freight unit building rule is used to create the freight unit?
10. What freight unit type has been used for the freight unit?
11. What is the requested time window of the freight unit at the destination location (CUSTOO-25)?
12. How many stages have been created in the freight unit?
13. Are there any successor documents to the freight unit?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
14. Is any block status defined for the freight unit?
15. What are the planned and actual quantities for product PRODTM-OO in this freight unit?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 2 Solution 5 Examine a Freight Unit
Business Example
As a manufacturer, you require a planning tool that supports your diverse requirements in relation to shipping various products. You need to investigate how SAP TM builds and plans freight units, as well as learn about the necessary tools to support planning. 1. Create a sales order for 50 pieces of product PRODTM-OO, for customer CUSTOO-25, with reference PO number TM200_00. Use the following organizational data: Field
Value
Order Type
ZTOO
Sales Org
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
a) In SAP ERP, enter transaction code vaoi. b) Enter the data from the table and choose Enter. c) On the screen, enter the following data: Field
Value
Sold-To Party
CUSTOO-25
PO Number
TM200_00
Material
PRODTM-OO
Quantity
50
d) Save your data. 2. Take note of the sales order number.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
3. Review the order based transportation requirement in SAP TM. What is the OTR-number that corresponds to your sales order? Which document type has been used for your OTR? Write down the document number of your OTR.
a) In NWBC, choose ERP Logistics Integration —> Worklist —*■ Overview Transportation Requirements. b) Choose the Order-based Transportaton Requirements (All) query. c) Identify your OTR by searching in the Original Order column for your sales order number. d) You can find the document type in the Document Type column. The document type of your OTR is OTRX. You can find the OTR number in the Document column. The document number varies. 4. Navigate into the OTR and review the information. What is the lifecycle status? The lifecycle status is ‘in planning’,________________________________________________ a) Choose your document number to navigate into your OTR, b) The lifecycle status is displayed on the General Data tab in the Statuses screen area. 5. What is the consumption status? The consumption status is ‘not consumed'._________________________________________ a) The consumption status is displayed on the General Data tab in the Statuses screen area. 6. What is the source location of product PRODTM-OO? The source location is SP3100 (Shipping Point Chicago).______________________________ a) In the Items screen area, select the row for PRODTM-OO. b) Select the Locations and Dates/ Times tab in the Items screen area to view the source location. 7. Is the source location visible on the Locations and Dates/Times tab in the Source screen area? Why not? The source location information is not filled here, because different items of the OTR may have different source locations. Thus, at header level, this information is not unique and therefore not displayed._________________________________________________________
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
a) Select the Locations and Dates/Times tab of the OTR to view the required information in the Source screen area. 8. Has a freight unit been created? If yes, note the freight unit number. Freight unit number varies.______________________________________________________ a) Select the Document Flow tab. You find a successor business document for your OTR. This is the freight unit. 9. What freight unit building rule is used to create the freight unit? Freight unit building rule FUBR_TM200 is used.______________________________________ a) Navigate into the freight unit by selecting the document number in the Document Flow tab of the order based transportation requirement. b) The freight unit building rule that is used is displayed on the General Data tab in the Additional Data screen area of the freight unit. 10. What freight unit type has been used for the freight unit? Freight unit type FUX2 is used.___________________________________________________ a) You find the freight unit type that has been used on the General Data tab in the Additional Data screen area of the freight unit. 11. What is the requested time window of the freight unit at the destination location (CUST00-25)? The requested start time of the delivery window is one day prior to the requested delivery date from your sales order. The requested end time of the delivery window is one day after the requested delivery date from your sales order.______________________________________ a) You find the information about the requested time window on the General Data tab of the freight unit. 12. How many stages have been created in the freight unit? Only one stage from SP3100 to CUST00-25 has been created in the freight unit, a) To view the stages, choose the Stages tab.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
13. Are there any successor documents to the freight unit? There are no successor business documents to the freight unit._________________________ a) Choose the Document Flow tab to view the required information. 14. Is any block status defined for the freight unit? The planning and execution block statuses are both green. There is no block status defined. a) Choose the Statuses tab to view the required information. 15. What are the planned and actual quantities for product PRODTM-OO in this freight unit? The planned quantities are: Quantity: 50 CRT; Gross Weight: 5,000 lb; Gross Volume: 1,765, 740 FT3; Net Weight: 4,750 lb. The actual quantities are empty because execution has not started. a) In the Items screen area, highlight the row for PRODTM-OO. b) Choose the Quantities tab in the Items screen area to view the planned quantities.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Examine freight unit management of individual shipping requirements
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 2 Lesson 3 Creating Freight Orders for Shipping
LESSON OVERVIEW This lesson examines freight order creation. You learn about manual (interactive) freight order creation, and automatic freight order creation using the Vehicle Scheduling and Routing (VSR) optimizer. Freight orders are a result of planning and can have different properties depending on their freight order type. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Create freight orders
Freight Orders In his role as an SAP transportation consultant, John is asked to explain the benefits of freight orders and how they are created using optimization criteria. John must describe the principles of vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimization used in SAP TM as well as explain the differences between freight units, transportation units and freight orders.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
SAP ERP Sales Order / Purchase Order Order-based Transportation Requirement
Forwarding Quotation Delivery-based Transportation Requirement
1
L ■e r r
Forwarding Order
Freight Unit Building
Capacities Execution / Subcontr.
Transportation Network Agreement
Charges / Settlement
Calculation Sheet
Freight Settlement Document
Forwarding Settlement Document
Rate Table
Figure 25: SAP TM Document Flow
Freight orders represent a single shipment or load departing from one of your facilities (outbound scenario) or arriving in one of your facilities (inbound scenario). The freight order can be created manually or automatically, for example, by using the vehicle scheduling and route optimizer. Freight orders are the basis for carrier selection, tendering or freight settlement processes. These topics are covered in separate units. SAP TM Document Flow
You can use the freight order management component in SAP TM to create and edit freight orders and freight bookings. You use freight orders for road and rail transportation and you use freight bookings for sea and air transportation. You can use the business documents in freight order management to enter all the information required for transportation planning and execution, such as source and destination locations, dates and times, product information, and resources used. You can create freight orders directly or in transportation planning. For example, you can assign freight units to the freight orders and have the system calculate the transportation charges. You can then perform carrier selection, assign the freight orders directly to a carrier as a suborder or perform tendering.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Freight Orders in Transportation Planning
Freight Order
FU 1
FU 1
Freight Order
FU 2
FU 3
Figure 26: Creating Freight Orders
In a freight order, freight units from different transportation requests (OTR/DTR/FWO) can be consolidated. The planning engine aims to find the lowest cost solution based on the freight units to be planned, the transportation network (as defined in master data) and, for example, the costs defined in the relevant planning profile. If freight orders are created during planning and have the respective settings in the planning profile, the system determines the freight order type according to the Customizing settings. Transportation Units
The transportation unit (TU) is somewhere in between the freight unit and the freight order. Several use cases for TUs are possible as a consolidation option.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Freight Unit
Transportation Unit
Freight Order
Represents demand
+
+
-
Default route to define stages
+
+
-
Provides capacity
-
+
+
Different quantities per stage
-
+
+
Cargo management
-
+
+
Subcontracting
-
-
+
| Feature
| Figure 27: Transportation Unit, Freight Unit, Freight Order - Comparison
Freight Order Types The freight order type determines how a freight order is processed in SAP TM. There are some basic settings allowing for flexible customization options. Freight order settings allow the planner to carry out the following tasks:
Define number range intervals Define subcontracting relevance Define how consignee and shipper are determined Define whether the freight order is to be fixed during saving Define whether the freight order can be deleted or only canceled Define sequence of stops Change controller settings Run checks on creation, save and deletion Freight order settings allow the planner to make the following settings:
Execution tracking Event management Output options Number ranges and strategies for house bills of lading (HB)
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Freight Oder Types Fraght Older Type ™>o TM1C0 Instrcto FOT v Default Type Default Type for ERP Shpment Integration Base Settngs
Number Range Settngs
Freight Order Can Be Subcontracted Sh^cer/Consignee Determination
Relevant for Subcontracting Determnatxn Based on Predecessor Docu_ -
Time for Drawing
Draw Number When Savng Do . ~
Number Range Interval
05
~‘Fb< Document When Saving •/ Freight Order Can Be Deleted Sequence Type of Stops
Defined and Unear
~ Additional Strategies
Change Contrder Settngs Default Change Strategy Change Strategy Determnation Cond. Quantity Toterance Condton
QUAHT_T0L_01
Creabon Strategy Save Strategy Detetnn Strategy
Date Tolerance Condition
Execution Settngs
Service Level Determination
Execution Track. Relev. Check Condton "Ready for Exec* [ Immedate Processng
Execution Tracking vtfth External Event Man. w
Default Service Level Service Level Cond.
•
1
•/ Propagate Execution Info Default MTr Determnation
Event Management Settngs Apcfcation object Type Last Exp. Event
0DT20_TO POD
Default MTr for Type Condtion for Def MTr
--- 1 _________ 1
Figure 28: Freight Order Type
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected] © Copyright. All rights reserved.
73
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 2 Exercise 6 Create a Freight Order
Business Example
As a transportation planner, you need to understand the principles of VSR optimization, and how to create a freight order based on outbound or inbound transportation requirements.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Examine a Freight Unit.
1. Enter the transportation cockpit with planing profile TM200_PLAN for the order based transportation requirement created in the previous exercise. Create an optimal transportation plan using the optimizer considering all available resources. 2. How many freight orders have been created?
3. What is the maximum utilization of the truck?
4. How long does it take to load and unload the truck at each location? Do you know why?
5. Which freight order type is used? Do you know why?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 2 Solution 6 Create a Freight Order
Business Example
As a transportation planner, you need to understand the principles of VSR optimization, and how to create a freight order based on outbound or inbound transportation requirements.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Examine a Freight Unit.
1. Enter the transportation cockpit with planing profile TM200_PLAN for the order based transportation requirement created in the previous exercise. Create an optimal transportation plan using the optimizer considering all available resources. a) In NWBC, choose ERP Logistics Integration —► Worklist —► Overview Transportation Requirements. b) Select the row with your order-based transportation requirement from the previous exercise. c) Choose Start Transportation Cockpit. d) In the Transportation Cockpit: Profile and Layout Sets choose New. (If the profile and layout screen does not open, choose Change Profile Selection —>Profile Selection Screen e) In the Planning Profile column, enter t m 200_p l a n . f) Save your data and continue. g) Select the freight unit to customer CUST00-25. Choose Optimizer Planning —>Selected Entries with All Resources. h) When the optimizer is complete, choose Accept. i) Choose Save. 2. How many freight orders have been created? One freight order has been created.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
3. What is the maximum utilization of the truck? 11%. Highlight the freight order in the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings view. In the detail view underneath (Overview tab), you can see that the maximum utilization of the truck is 11%. (If you are not sure which FO corresponds to your freight unit, in the Freight Units Stages screen area you can scroll to the Execution Document column to identify your FO number).________ 4. How long does it take to load and unload the truck at each location? Do you know why? Highlight the freight order in the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings view. In the detail view (Overview tab), you can see that each loading and unloading activity takes 10 minutes. Hint: Scroll to the right to compare the start and end times of the activities. In planning profile TM200_PLAN, it has been defined that the loading and unloading times are independent of freight unit and means of transport, and that they take ten minutes. To view this, choose Application Administration —>Planning —>Planning Profiles —>Display Planning Profile._______ 5. Which freight order type is used? Do you know why? Choose the freight order ID to open your freight order. In the General Data tab, you can see the document type is TM00. This is because the "Default type for road (FO)" has been defined as TM00 in your planning profile._________________________________________________
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Create freight orders
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 2
Learning Assessment
1. Planning is carried out on the freight unit - which must first be created. Place a tick beside each of the options below which can trigger the creation of a freight unit. Choose the correct answers. | A Freight Order B Purchase Order | C Forwarding Order D Sales Order 2. Which of the following planning constraints can be considered in SAP Transportation Management? Choose the correct answers. | A Vehicle resource capacities B Compartment capacities | C Depot locations D Driver qualifications 3. In relation to freight unit building in SAP TM and based on what you have learned in this lesson, place a tick beside each of the statements below which are true. Choose the correct answers. | A Freight units can be created manually or automatically. B FUBRs can be used to specify rules in relation to how freight units are consoildated or split. | C A freight unit can be described as a collection of goods that are transported together across the entire transportation chain. D There is just a single predecessor document that can lead to the creation of a freight unit: the sales order.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
4. How many freight units are created for an order-based transportation requirement with three items if a freight unit building rule that does not allow item splitting is selected? Choose the correct answer. | A Always exactly 1 B Always exactly 3 C 1 or more
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 2
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Planning is carried out on the freight unit - which must first be created. Place a tick beside each of the options below which can trigger the creation of a freight unit. Choose the correct answers. | A Freight Order [x ] B Purchase Order [x ] C Forwarding Order
|~x]
D Sales Order
Correct. All of the options except the freight order can trigger the creation of a freight unit. The freight order is a successor document to the freight unit. 2. Which of the following planning constraints can be considered in SAP Transportation Management? Choose the correct answers. |~X~| A Vehicle resource capacities [x ] B Compartment capacities [x ] C Depot locations D Driver qualifications That is correct. Capacities for vehicles resources and compartments as well as depot locations are planning constraints considered in SAP Transportation Management.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
3. In relation to freight unit building in SAP TM and based on what you have learned in this lesson, place a tick beside each of the statements below which are true. Choose the correct answers. |~xj A Freight units can be created manually or automatically. |~xj
B FUBRs can be used to specify rules in relation to how freight units are consoildated or split.
\x \ C A freight unit can be described as a collection of goods that are transported together across the entire transportation chain. D There is just a single predecessor document that can lead to the creation of a freight unit: the sales order. Correct. Only one of the statements is not true. Freight units can be generated not only from sales orders but out of any FWO, DTR or OTR. 4. How many freight units are created for an order-based transportation requirement with three items if a freight unit building rule that does not allow item splitting is selected? Choose the correct answer. | A Always exactly 1 B Always exactly 3 |~xj C 1 or more
That is correct. At least one freight unit is created. Depending on the quantities and split value, more than one freight unit may be created.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
UNIT 3
SAP Transportation M anagem ent Transportation Netw ork
Lesson 1 Integrating SAP ERP Master Data with SAP TM Exercise 7: Generate and Activate an Integration Model
85 93
Lesson 2 Evaluating Location Masters
102
Exercise 8: Examine Location Masters
111
Lesson 3 Creating Transportation Zones Exercise 9: Define Transportation Zones
117 125
Lesson 4 Defining Methods of Transportation
131
Exercise 10: Create a Means of Transport
141
Lesson 5 Defining Transportation Lanes Exercise 11: Create Transportation Lanes Exercise 12: Calculate Durations and Distances using Transportation Lanes
145 147 159
Lesson 6 Creating Carrier Profiles
162
Exercise 13: Create Carrier Profiles
169
Lesson 7 Examining Resources in SAP TM
172
Exercise 14: Define Capacity Limits with Vehicle Resources
177
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
UNIT OBJECTIVES
•
Examine the transfer of master data from the Core Interface to SAP TM
•
Integrate customer master data
•
Examine locations in SAP TM
•
Examine customers in SAP TM
•
Examine vendors in SAP TM
•
Examine business partners in SAP TM
•
Evaluate shipping points in SAP TM
•
Evaluate geocoding locations in SAP TM
•
Create transportation zones
•
Create transportation zone hierarchies
•
Define transportation modes
•
Define means of transport
•
Create a transportation lane
•
Examine transportation lane application during transportation planning
•
Examine the purpose of carrier profiles
•
Examine product and transportation groups
•
Examine equipment groups and equipment types
•
Create carrier profiles
•
Apply calendar resources
•
Apply handling resources
•
Apply vehicle resources
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Lesson 1 Integrating SAP ERP Master Data with SAP TM
LESSON OVERVIEW This lesson examines the integration process between SAP ERP and SAP TM. You learn about the SAP ERP master data that is relevant for integration with SAP TM. and examine how the Core Interface (CIF) supports the process of integration.
At the end of the lesson you can generate and activate an integration model. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Examine the transfer of master data from the Core Interface to SAP TM
•
Integrate customer master data
S A PTM Integration Scenarios
Master Data is integrated from SAP ERP to SAP TM via the CIF (core interface). Transactional Data is integrated between SAP ERP and SAP TM either directly via web services or indirectly using SAP PI (process integration).
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
CIF provides the following central functions: •
Determine source and target systems within complex system environments
•
Initial transfer of master data from the ERP system
•
Tools for administering the data transfer
Master data changes can be transferred via the following: •
Transfer of data changes using Application Linking and Embedding (ALE) change pointers
•
Online transfer using business transfer events (BTEs)
The Integration Process When implementing TM, consider if your business is integrating to SAP ERP, or implementing TM as a stand-alone product. Depending on which scenario applies to your business, the integration options differ. In the case of a shipper using a back end SAP ERP system, the business requires automated integration when implementing TM. When using SAP ERP, integration is delivered in two formats. The first is used to support the integration of master data. This is referred to as the Core Interface (CIF). This uses a queued remote call function (qRFC) process to create and synchronize the data as frequently as required. The second integration format is for transactional data and is discussed in a later unit.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Step 1: Select the Relevant ERP data models using transaction CFM1
Figure 31: CIF Master Data Models
Integration Between SAP ERP and SAP TM
The integration between SAP ERP and TM is a two-step process. The first step is to determine what data from your ERP system needs to be replicated in TM. This is activated by a scheduled batch job using a program variant. For example, as you create new customer master records you may need to transfer these to TM on a daily basis; these can be considered in the nightly TM planning run. Once the data is selected, the transfer process is prompted from ERP. Using RFC calls, the data is created in TM. Similar to the selection process, this is prompted by a scheduled job using program variants. This two-step process is managed by a business analyst or a member of the IT group.
Integration Model Generation The CIF uses an object called an integration model to manage the data transfer and synchronization process between SAP ERP and the SAP New Dimension products. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
TM is used to support only the transportation aspect of logistics; not all items in the integration model will integrate. Generate integration model. Name ^
^
Determine name and SAP TM target system. Select master data.
Target system Application Plant Material master
Activate integration model. Integration model is active.
4
®
Start
Master data will be transferred.
Figure 33: Generate Integration Model/Activate Integration Model
The Integration Model The transfer of master data and transaction data is controlled in the CIF by an integration model. You create, generate, and activate this integration model in the ERP system. Integration models do not exist in TM. In the integration model, select the dataset (master or transaction data) you want to transfer. Specify the following in the integration model: •
The SAP TM target system for the data transfer
•
The data objects you want to transfer
Define the integration model that controls the transfer of master and transaction data in the ERP system. You can find the menu option Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer (the CIF menu) under Logistics —*• Central Functions —> Supply Chain Planning Interface. The integration model distinguishes between master data and transaction data. When integrating with TM, you transfer master data via the integration models. We recommend that you select different types of data in separate integration models and then transfer them separately, for example, shipping points, customers, or vendors.
Note: Your ERP system may use integration models to communicate with an APO instance and an instance of EWM. All use integration models and transfer similar data, but the target systems are different. You can deactivate and then delete the integration models that you no longer need.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Generate the Integration Model
A unique definition of the integration model is given by its name and application. The master data transferred from the ERP system to the SAP TM system in the initial transfer is defined in an integration model. The ERP system generates this integration model (transaction CFM1). Elements in an Integration Model In the ERP system, a unique integration model consists of five elements:
1. Model Name 2. Logical System 3. APO Application 4. Date 5. Time We recommend that you have one integration model per object. To integrate a master data object, identify the model name, logical system, and APO application. Select the object that you want to transfer to TM. Assuming you do not want to transfer every material in the ERP database, restrict the metadata you want to transfer. Transfer only the active materials.
Note: Although the field is labeled APO application, the field is still applicable to TM. You may want to use the model name field to represent the business division and the application (TM/APO/EWM) that the integration model is going to be used to support. The APO application can be used to identify objects in the integration model, such as materials, customers, or vendors.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
It is useful to create several integration models with the same name, but as different applications. Ensure that your integration model data pools are not too large. This enables you to handle errors more easily. Integration Model Generation The target or logical system that you specify in the integration model determines the new dimension (TM) system to which the master data is transferred. The target system is a logical (TM) system that must have an RFC connection. This is defined by the basis team. Specify the model, logical system, APO application, the object, and metadata. Save this as a program variant. This schedules the generating integration models program on a nightly basis. It calls out the program variants you created. Once the program variant is created, generate an integration model by executing the model. The ERP system then reviews your database and identifies what items are transferred and created in TM. You may do this interactively the first time you generate an integration model. Subsequently, the program is scheduled as a background job. Integration Model Activation
Integration model Nam e
PUMPSI
T arg et system
A PQ CLN T800
A pp lication
M A TER IA LS
"A ctivate" PUM PS
£?
I
r
M aterial m a s te r B M aterial m a s te r A _________ ___________ r
A ctiv e /ln a c tiv e
A PO CLN T800
M A TER IA LS
10:00 AM
Figure 35: Activating an Integration Model for Initial Data Transfer
To transfer data to TM, you must activate the integration model generated. You activate an integration model with transaction
c f m 2.
Choose ERP —► Logistics —> Central Functions —*■ Supply Chain Planning Interface —> Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer —> Integration Model —*• Activate Choose the Start function to trigger the data transfer to TM. The master data, or the equivalent of the ERP master data then exists in the TM system. The initial data transfer runs in a particular order: the objects are selected successively, transferred to TM and processed there in this sequence. For improved system performance, it is also possible to execute a parallel initial data transfer. Several integration models can be For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
activated at the same time. During parallel processing, you can set whether to run the selection in RPC, the processing in TM, or both at the same time. Parallel processing takes place within an object type. The different object types are still transferred in sequence. Integration Model Regeneration
ER New
N am e T arget system Appl.
PUM PS APO CLN T800
Existing integration model
M A TER IA LS
K 4 M aterial m aster
X
"A ctivate"
M R P type
xo
PUM PS
A PO CLN T800
M A TER IA LS
11:00 AM
P U M PS
APO CLN T800
M A TER IA LS
10:00 AM
s? A ctive/ln active I ■
1
Difference is transferred
Figure 36: Repeat Generation and Activation
You can regenerate and activate an existing active integration model with the same or changed selection criteria, under the same name at any time. The existing model is regenerated (and the new master data is selected). There are then two models with the same name. The only difference between them is the date and time. This option is suitable for transferring new or changed TM-relevant master data. If you activate a regenerated model, only the difference in the objects not contained in the runtime version is transferred, including any change pointers that may exist. The system compares the existing, active integration models with the new model for each object and determines which new master data needs to be created in TM (delta transfer). Data Transfer After the data is transferred, the old integration model is deactivated and the new integration model is activated. For example, you activate model 1 with the material masters A and B, and activate model 2 in the second step with the material masters B and C. Thus, when you activate model 2, only material C will be transferred. When you deactivate model 1, the integration for materials B and C remains.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Periodic Regeneration of an Existing Integration Model
R ep o rt R IM O D G E N
N am e
Generate integration model
w
PUM PS
T arg et system
APO CLN T800
A pplication
M A TER IA LS
JO B 1
V arian t P U M P MAT
E xecute ____ + _____ O
R ep o rt R IM O D A C 2
cD O S tep 1
Save
Activate integration model JO B _2
Nam e
PUM PS
T arget system
APO CLN T800
A pplication
M A TER IA LS
^Active/lnactive
+
S tep 1
S ta rt
Figure 37: Periodic Regeneration of an Existing Model
To ensure that the system transfers all the TM-relevant master data, it is possible to regenerate periodically and activate the existing integration models. Because any existing change pointers are also processed in this procedure, a separate transfer of data changes is no longer necessary. Integration models can be regenerated and activated in regular intervals. You can do this automatically through the definition of jobs. Report RIMODGEN generates an integration model. You schedule this report by entering a variant that you define as a job. Report RIMODAC2 activates an integration model. You need a variant for this report to enable you to schedule it in a job. You can retransfer all the data objects with report RIMODINI. You need a variant for this report to schedule it in a job. The entire data record is transferred. If, for example, you change just one field in a material master, the entire material master is retransferred with the data change transfer.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Exercise 7 Generate and Activate an Integration Model
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load (TL) and less-than-truckload (LTL) planning scenarios. The SAP consultant needs to create appropriate CIF models to transfer master data from SAP ERP to SAP TM. Set Up Data Transfer from SAP ERP to SAP TM Your business wants to integrate your customers, carriers, and materials from SAP ERP to SAP TM. Create the necessary integration models to support this activity and ensure that you can generate new integration models if necessary.
1. In SAP ERP, create a CIF model to transfer customers from SAP ERP to SAP TM. Save your data, and name and describe the variant. Use the following data: Field
Value
Model
TM_GR##
Logical System
ZMTCLNT800
APO Application
Customers
Variant
GR## Cust
Description
GR## Customer Integration
Material Independent Objects screen area
Customer
Customer from
CUST##-01
Customer to
CUST##-30
Create Loc./BP field
2
2. Generate an integration model. 3. In SAP ERP, create a CIF model to transfer carrier master data. Save your data, and name and describe the variant. Use the following data: Field
Value
Model
TM_GR##
Logical System
ZMTCLNT800
APO Application
Carriers
Material Independent Objects screen area
Vendor
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Vendors from
CAR##-01
Vendors to
CAR##-04
Create Loc./BP field
1
Variant
GR## Carrier
Description
Group ## Carriers/FWD Agents
4. Generate an integration model. 5. In SAP ERP, create a CIF model to transfer material master data. Save your data, and name and describe the variant. Use the following data: Field
Value
Model
TM_GR##
Logical System
ZMTCLNT800
APO Application
Products
Variant
GR## Prod
Description
GR## Product Integration
Material Dependent Objects screen area
Material
Materials from
PRDTM-##
6. Generate an integration model. Transfer Data from SAP ERP to SAP TM You have now selected the master data to transfer and integrate with SAP TM. You now need to initiate the transfer process. Trigger the activation of your new integration models.
1. In SAP ERP, configure the parameters for transfer of master data to SAP TM. Select the Parallelize Selection in ERP System checkbox. Use the following data: Field
Value
Model Name
TM_GR##
Logical System
ZMTCLNT800.
Absolute Max No. of Processes
20
2. In SAP ERP, transfer customer master data to TM. Drill down on your logical system ZMTCLNT800 and your model TM_GR## to transfer the customer data. 3. In SAP ERP, transfer carrier master data to SAP TM. Drill down on your logical system ZMTCLNT800 and your model TM_GR## to transfer the carrier data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
4. In SAP ERP, transfer material master data to SAP TM. Drill down on your logical system ZMTCLNT800 and your model TM_GR##, to transfer the material data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Solution 7 Generate and Activate an Integration Model
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load (TL) and less-than-truckload (LTL) planning scenarios. The SAP consultant needs to create appropriate CIF models to transfer master data from SAP ERP to SAP TM. Set Up Data Transfer from SAP ERP to SAP TM Your business wants to integrate your customers, carriers, and materials from SAP ERP to SAP TM. Create the necessary integration models to support this activity and ensure that you can generate new integration models if necessary.
1. In SAP ERP, create a CIF model to transfer customers from SAP ERP to SAP TM. Save your data, and name and describe the variant. Use the following data: Field
Value
Model
TM_GR##
Logical System
ZMTCLNT800
APO Application
Customers
Variant
GR## Cust
Description
GR## Customer Integration
Material Independent Objects screen area
Customer
Customer from
CUST##-01
Customer to
CUST##-30
Create Loc./BP field
2
a) In SAP ERP, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics —> Central Functions —> Supply Chain Planning Interface —► Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer —► Integration Model —> Create. b) Enter the data from the table for the model, logical system and APO application. c) Select the Customers checkbox and choose
Special Restrictions.
d) Create your customers CUST##-01 to CUST##-30. e) Enter the Create Loc./BP field value from the table.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
f) Save your data. g) Name and describe the variant. h) Save your data. 2. Generate an integration model. a) Choose
Execute to process the selection.
b) Choose
Generate IM to generate the integration model.
c) Choose
Continue on the information message.
d) Exit the screen. 3. In SAP ERP, create a CIF model to transfer carrier master data. Save your data, and name and describe the variant. Use the following data:________________________________________ Field
Value
Model
TM_GR# #
Logical System
ZMTCLNT800
APO Application
Carriers
Material Independent Objects screen area
Vendor
Vendors from
CAR##-01
Vendors to
CAR##-04
Create Loc./BP field
1
Variant
GR## Carrier
Description
Group ## Carriers/FWD Agents
a) In SAP ERP, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics —> Central Functions —> Supply Chain Planning Interface —> Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer —► Integration Model —> Create. b) Enter the data from the table. c) Manually enter the APO Application: Carriers d) Select the Vendor checkbox and choose £> e) Create your vendors CAR##-01 to CAR##-04. f) Enter 1 in the Create Loc./BP field. g) Choose Go to —► Variants —*• Save as Variants h) Name and describe the variant. i) Save your data. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
4. Generate an integration model. a) Choose
Execute to process the selection.
b) Choose
Generate IM to generate the integration model.
c) Choose ^
Continue on the information message.
d) Exit the screen. 5. In SAP ERP, create a CIF model to transfer material master data. Save your data, and name and describe the variant. Use the following data: Field
Value
Model
TM_GR# #
Logical System
ZMTCLNT800
APO Application
Products
Variant
GR## Prod
Description
GR## Product Integration
Material Dependent Objects screen area
Material
Materials from
PRDTM-##
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics —*■ Central Functions —> Supply Chain Planning Interface —>Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer —► Integration Model —> Create. b) Enter the data from the table. c) Select the Materials checkbox. d) In the Material Independent Objects screen area, select the Materials checkbox and choose £>. Enter the materials data from the table. e) Choose Go to —> Variant —> Save as Variant. f) Name and describe the variant. g) Save your data. 6. Generate an integration model. a) Choose Execute to process the selection. b) Choose Generate IM to generate an integration message. c) Choose Continue on the information message. d) Exit this screen.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Transfer Data from SAP ERP to SAP TM You have now selected the master data to transfer and integrate with SAP TM. You now need to initiate the transfer process. Trigger the activation of your new integration models.
1. In SAP ERP, configure the parameters for transfer of master data to SAP TM. Select the Parallelize Selection in ERP System checkbox. Use the following data: Field
Value
Model Name
TM_GR##
Logical System
ZMTCLNT800.
Absolute Max No. of Processes
20
a) In SAP ERP, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics —> Central Functions —> Supply Chain Planning Interface —> Core Interface Advanced Planning and Optimizer —► Integration Model —*■ Activate . b) Enter the data from the table. c) Choose (^E xecute. 2. In SAP ERP, transfer customer master data to TM. Drill down on your logical system ZMTCLNT800 and your model TM_GR## to transfer the customer data. a) Select Customers to show model details. b) Select the top line and choose c) Select the line again and choose
Active/lnactive. Start to initiate the transfer.
If you receive a pop-up message telling you that the queue is blocked, choose Ignore. d) Answer NO to branching to application logs and choose ^ message.
Continue on the information
e) Stay in the transaction. 3. In SAP ERP, transfer carrier master data to SAP TM. Drill down on your logical system ZMTCLNT800 and your model TM_GR## to transfer the carrier data. a) Select Carrier to show model details. b) Select the top line and choose c) Select the line again and choose
Active/lnactive. Start to initiate the transfer.
If you receive a pop-up message telling you that the queue is blocked, choose Ignore. d) Answer NO to branching to application logs and choose ^ message.
Continue on the information
4. In SAP ERP, transfer material master data to SAP TM. Drill down on your logical system ZMTCLNT800 and your model TM_GR##, to transfer the material data. a) Choose Products to show model details.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
b) Select the top line and choose Active/lnactive. c) Select the line again and choose Start to initiate the transfer. If you receive a pop-up message telling you that the queue is blocked, choose Ignore. d) Answer No to branching to application logs and choose Continue on the information message.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Examine the transfer of master data from the Core Interface to SAP TM
•
Integrate customer master data
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Lesson 2 Evaluating Location Masters
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, we examine SAP ERP and SAP TM location types. We consider the roles of the customer, vendor, and business partner in transportation planning.
At the end of this lesson, you will be able to determine the shipping point and geocode locations used in SAP TM. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Examine locations in SAP TM
•
Examine customers in SAP TM
•
Examine vendors in SAP TM
•
Examine business partners in SAP TM
•
Evaluate shipping points in SAP TM
•
Evaluate geocoding locations in SAP TM
Location Types in SAP TM A location is a logical or physical place in which resources are managed on a quantity basis. This business object is used as the basis for the transportation processes in which you name a source location, a destination location, and any transshipment locations necessary to complete it. Purpose of Locations
The following are a number of the purposes of locations: •
Freight is moved between locations in SAP TM
•
A freight unit always has both a source location and a destination location
•
A freight unit may travel through a number of locations
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Define a Location Type
Locatio n type D escrip tion
1001
Production plant
1002
Distribution center
1003
Shipping point
1010
Customer
1011
Vendor
1030
Terminal
1100
Port
1110
Airport
1120
Railway station
1130
Container Freight Station
1140
Hub
1150
Gateway
1160
Container Yard
1170
Warehouse
1180
Carrier Warehouse
Figure 38: Location Types
To define a location in TM, specify its name and type. ERP and TM Location Types ERP
SAP TM
Figure 39: ERP and TM Location Types
Different customizing entries and master data elements from ERP are displayed in SAP TM as locations with different location types. ERP plants, customers, vendors, and shipping points are integrated with SAP TM and become the following types of location: Plants-1001 (production
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
plant) or 1002 (distribution center), Customers-1010 (customer), Vendors-1011 (vendor), and Shipping Points-1003 (shipping point). The location type is automatically determined based on the object being transferred from ERP when location data is created via the CIF. Customers in SAP TM SAP ERP defines the customer as a business partner with whom a business relationship involving the issue of goods or services exists. SAP TM considers how these customers relate to planning. The customer is relevant to planning during transportation planning in TM. Sales orders are generated in SAP ERP and transferred to SAP TM as requirements for planning in the context of shipping.
Data transfer from the customer (ERP) M a s te r d a ta : C u s to m e r
Customer ^ooo; N am e
Be c k e r
S tre e t cfccalvinstr. 36 C ity
<0 3 4 6 7 B erlin
CountryC^DE C g tm tn rf D E
R egion Q 1 1
G erm an y Berlin
Language
L a n g u a g e — f G erm a7i~
M aster data: Transportation Zone Tr.Zone
D 10000
Berlin region
Figure 40: Customer Location Type
Transferring Customers from ERP SAP TM plans shipments to one or more customers. TM works with the SAP ERP delivery processing. This functionality requires information about customers and their geographic locations to calculate distances and durations during an optimization planning run. Customers are transferred from ERP as locations with type 1010. TM customers represent a destination location in the case of a sales order, or a source location in the case of a returns order. Because these are objects created by the CIF, the system also copies basic settings for the customer such as description, address data, and time zone. TM locations contain additional planning parameters that have no equivalents in SAP ERP. You must maintain these parameters in TM. The system cannot transfer them from ERP without further activities.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Vendors in SAP TM SAP ERP defines the vendor as a business partner from whom materials or services are procured. The vendor master is master data, whether it is created for a one time purchase or as a partner with whom your organization engages continuously.
Vendor Master Records
When vendor master records are transferred to SAP TM they prompt the creation of location master records of location type 1011. If you are modeling an inbound scenario, transfer the materials supplier as a location. This is the shipping location. When transferring vendors from ERP, create both the location master and the business partner. Both customer and vendor master data exist in the SAP SCM location master data. If customer and vendor masters in the SAP ERP system have the same number ranges, any vendor master having the same account number as a customer master must be renamed. A user-exit exists for this purpose; during the transfer of SAP ERP master data any vendor account number that is a duplicate of a customer master can be renamed automatically. Carrier locations are normally not needed in TM. Carriers that provide services that we order and pay for are created as business partners. Business Partners Different business partners with various relationships to one another exist in the marketplace. Examples of business partners are: •
Customer
•
Vendor
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
•
Employee
•
Contact person
•
Driver
Examples of business relationships are: •
Vendor-customer: The vendor acts as the forwarding agent for the customer.
•
Contact person - customer: The contact person is employed at the customer's company.
•
Contact person - customer: The contact person is the customer's consultant but does not work in the same company.
•
Customer-customer: Sold-to party and ship-to party are not the same.
•
Employee - contact person: Contact person is looked after individually.
•
Employee - customer: Customer manager
Partner Types The business partners that exist in the marketplace are represented in the SAP system by a partner type. Partner types AP. KU, LI, and PE are defined in partner processing for the sales and distribution application module. These are defined as follows: Acronym
Definition
AP
Contact Person
KU
Customer
LI
Vendor
PE
Personnel
Partner Functions
Figure 42: Slide 1
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Partner types allow us to distinguish between different business partners. Partner functions represent the roles they play within the business transaction. For example, different customer partners can assume certain roles in a business transaction. The customer who places the order is not necessarily the same customer who receives the goods or is responsible for paying the invoice Assigning Partner Functions Assigning partner functions in the SAP system determines the functions of particular partners in the sales process. One partner may have several functions. For example, when all the partner functions within the customer partner type are assigned to one business partner, the same customer is the sold-to party, ship-to party, payer and bill-to party. You can enter contact persons for a customer directly in the customer master so that they are automatically assigned to that customer. The contact person can also be assigned to another customer, in, for example, a consultant role. The forwarding agent is an example of a vendor. Employees in your company are managed in the employee master records. They can assume partner functions of partner type Personnel, such as the partner function ER: Employee Responsible. Integrating Business Partners
Customer
CIF
C>
a
Customer - 1010
SP S old-to party
SH S hip-to party
kv
J BP B ill-to party
CIF
business [partner Rol
PY P a y e r
if
VE Vendor Vendor - 1011
Supplier
CIF
£ ©
Figure 43: Business Partner Integration
In business transaction documents such as a forwarding order, the BP master data object appears as a participating party in transportation processes. The party assumes roles, such as consignee, shipper, or ordering party. The CIF models involved in customers and vendors require more than plant and material data. This is to ensure that when the customers and vendors are transferred, the business partner and locations are created. When the CIF model is constructed, input a setting for customers and vendors. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Business Partners and Locations
In the Create Loc./BP there are three settings: 1. Blank-Only create a location 2. 1-Only create a business partner 3. 2- Create business partner and location 2- Create business partner and location is relevant for SAP TM 8.0. Shipping point location type 1003 does not have this setting, but must have a defined business partner. The business partner for the shipping point is created manually in SAP TM and assigned to the shipping point location. During the transfer of a location, it is created with the corresponding type and if selected in the CIF, the business partner is created automatically in SAP TM and assigned to the location. Shipping Points in TM In the SAP ERP system, each inventory-relevant location can be assigned one or more shipping points. A shipping point is an independent organizational unit at a fixed location that processes and monitors inbound and outbound deliveries.
'm Plant (1001)
Truck Warehouse
Rail Loading Station
Shippinq Point (1003)
Shipping Point (1003)
Figure 44: Shipping Point Integration
In ERP, the shipping point can have the following information assigned to it: •
Address
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
•
Transportation Zone
•
Factory Calendar
•
Working Times
•
Loading time
•
Pick/Pack Time
Shipping Point Integration As a result of CIF integration, a shipping point in SAP ERP creates a location master with a location type 1003 (shipping point). The location will have the address information from SAP ERP because of integration. No other data assigned to the shipping point in ERP transfers to TM because the parameters are maintained differently to support more robust planning functionality. If the shipping point has the same name as the plant, a Business Add-In (BAdl) is applied to SAP ERP before the shipping point can be transferred. The BAdl adds an extension to the shipping point name so that it is different from the plant. Geocoding Locations Locations are critical elements of your transportation network, because they identify source and destination points. Based on where these two points are located, SAP TM can use distance and duration to calculate the best means of transporting a product. As a result of integration with SAP ERP, most locations that are transferred via the CIF have an address. Unfortunately, this address information is not useful for planners or TM. We must translate how that appears on a map. To see geographic information related to location master data, from the SAP TM main menu choose Master Data —> Transportation Network —> Define Location Geographical Information Geographical information plays an important role in TM. Almost all business processes relate to it. High quality geodata improves these processes. The SAP TM Transportation Network is the foundation of a transportation planning process. Its basic elements are locations. These represent spots where business takes place, actions occur, and activities are executed. Locations can be connected via transportation lanes which express the opportunity to transport goods.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Locations Street Address Street/House number
West Chester Pike |
Postal Code/City
19073
Country
US
3999
Newtown Square PA
Region
Geographical Data Sign +
Longitude Latitude
-
Degrees
Minutes Seconds
39
11
18
75
46
15
Precision
900
Figure 45: Geocoding for Locations
A location is a specific point on the earth's surface that is defined by the geographical coordinates of longitude, latitude, and altitude. These coordinates are determined from the address data of a location. An address can contain a country, region, postal code, city, district, street, and house number, as well as additional fields. Determining geographical coordinates from address data is called geo-coding. A geographical information system can be used to get precise geographical coordinates. Geo-coordinates In SAP TM, the location master data object describes the geographical setup of the transportation network underlying business processes. Location can store an address and the geographical coordinates that define its position. The accuracy of the geo-coordinates depends on the address data provided and which service is used to determine them. Standard SAP SCM applications automatically determine a geo-coordinate at region level when creating or changing the location address data. This is sufficient for processes not working with static information or depending on distances, times, or map display. Because geo-coordinates are the basis for distance and duration determination and map display, they must be high quality in case those functions are required. Geo-coordinates are displayed in degrees, minutes, and seconds in the Geographical Data area of the Location user interface and can be overwritten manually by the user. The precision field indicates the granularity of the geo-coding result. A geocoder determines the geographical coordinates (longitude and latitude) from a given address. Two levels of geocoding are possible in SAP TM: 1. Standard (SAPO) (included in SAP TM software license) 2. Full addresses (depending on capabilities of geocoding software)
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Exercise 8 Examine Location Masters
Business Example
You want to verify that master data has been successfully transferred from SAP ERP. For this reason you check the location and business partner master data that you have transferred in the previous exercise. You also want to verify that geocoding information has been added to the location master data. Review some of the details of the integration process.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Generate and Activate an Integration Model.
1. In NWBC, view location master data for CUST##-16. What is the address?
2. What are the geo-coordinates of this customer location?
3. Are the loading and unloading hours defined for this customer?
4. What business partner is created?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
5. View location master data for CUST##-17. What is the address?
6. What business partner is created?
7. Review business partner CUST##-16 that was created in SAP TM as a result of CIF integration. 8. What business partner roles are created?
9. What account group is customer CUST##-16 assigned to?
10. Review business partner CAR##-01 that was created in SAP TM as a result of CIF integration. 11. What business partner roles are created?
12. What account group is carrier CAR##-01 assigned to?
13. What payment terms have been defined for carrier CAR##-01?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Solution 8 Examine Location Masters
Business Example
You want to verify that master data has been successfully transferred from SAP ERP. For this reason you check the location and business partner master data that you have transferred in the previous exercise. You also want to verify that geocoding information has been added to the location master data. Review some of the details of the integration process.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Generate and Activate an Integration Model.
1. In NWBC, view location master data for CUST##-16. What is the address? The address is 800 Independence Avenue, Evansville, IN 47713, USA.__________________ a) Open the Master Data folder. b) Choose Transportation Network —► Locations —> Define Location. c) In the Location field, enter
cust#
# - 16 and choose Display.
d) Select the Address tab. 2. What are the geo-coordinates of this customer location? The geo-coordinates are: Longitude: 86 Deg. 15 Minutes 0 Seconds, Latitude: 40 Deg. 0 Minutes 0 Seconds. (The geocodes may vary based on the GIS currently integrated with the TM system).__________________________________________________________________ a) Select the General Data tab to view the required information.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
3. Are the loading and unloading hours defined for this customer? By choosing the Resources tab, you can assign resources to your locations to support loading and unloading details. Because this is TM data and this item was transferred from ERP, it may not have been maintained._______________________________________________________ a) Select the Resources tab to view the required information. 4. What business partner is created? Business partner CUST##-16 is created and assigned to your customer location.__________ a) Select the General tab to view the required information. 5. View location master data for CUST##-17. What is the address? The address is 599 Northwestern, Louisville, KY 40212 USA.___________________________ a) Open the Master Data folder. b) Choose Transportation Network —>Location —>Define Location. c) Enter c u s t ##-17 in the Location field, and choose Display. d) Select the Address tab. 6. What business partner is created? Business partner CUST##-17 is created and assigned to your customer location.___________ a) Select the General tab to view the required information. 7. Review business partner CUST##-16 that was created in SAP TM as a result of CIF integration. a) In NWBC, open the Master Data folder. b) Choose General —*■ Define Business Partner. c) Enter business partner c u s t ##-1 6 in the Business Partner field. 8. What business partner roles are created? Four roles are created for this partner: Business Partner (Gen.), Financial Services BP, Ship-to Party, and Sold-to Party.________________________________________________________ a) Open the Display in BP Role dropdown menu to view the partner roles.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
9. What account group is customer CUST##-16 assigned to? CUST##-16 is assigned to account group KUNA._____________________________________ a) In the Display in BP role dropdown menu, change the party role to Sold-to-party. b) Select the Customer Data tab to view the required information. 10. Review business partner CAR##-01 that was created in SAP TM as a result of CIF integration. a) In NWBC, open the Master Data folder. b) Choose General —► Define Business Partner. c) Choose 0," Open BP. d) Enter business partner c a r # # - 0 1 . 11. What business partner roles are created? Three roles are created for this partner: Business Partner (Gen.), Carrier, and Financial Services BP.__________________________________________________________________ a) Open the Display in BP Role dropdown menu to view the partner roles. 12. What account group is carrier CAR##-01 assigned to? The account group is 0005 — Forwarding Agent._____________________________________ a) In the Display in BP role dropdown menu, change the party role to Carrier. b) Select the Vendor Data tab to view the required information. 13. What payment terms have been defined for carrier CAR##-01? The payment terms defined are 0001 — Pay immediately w /o deduction._________________ a) In the Display in BP role dropdown menu, change the party role to Carrier. b) Select the Vendor Company Org. Data tab to view the required information.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Examine locations in SAP TM
•
Examine customers in SAP TM
•
Examine vendors in SAP TM
•
Examine business partners in SAP TM
•
Evaluate shipping points in SAP TM
•
Evaluate geocoding locations in SAP TM
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Lesson 3 Creating Transportation Zones
LESSON OVERVIEW The transportation network can be a huge entity with significant amounts of master data to be maintained. In this lesson, you will examine how the use of transportation zones can reduce the amount of network master data that needs to be maintained. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Create transportation zones
•
Create transportation zone hierarchies
Transportation Zone Usage
A source location and a destination location are required for transportation planning. In the outbound shipper scenario, the source location is the plant or shipping point and the destination location is the customer. Master data is needed to determine the difference between the customer’s delivery date and the source location’s shipping date. The Purpose of Transportation Zones
Transportation zones are used by SAP TM for two purposes:
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
1. In sales order scheduling, the system can use the duration between the shipping location and the receiving location to determine the material availability date. 2. In the planning run, TM looks for opportunities to combine shipments into optimal loads for vehicle resources for orders going to the same geographical area. Transportation zones are used to group individual locations. For example, ship-to-locations can be grouped depending on your organization’s internal and external transportation network. In the example above, all locations in the US state of Illinois have been grouped in a zone. Transportation zones are typically used as the origin and destination points for transportation lanes. Transportation Zones in Planning
Transportation zones are typically used as the origin and destination points for transportation lanes. Transportation zones reduce the effort needed to model the geographic network in planning. Grouping locations into transportation zones reduces the volume of master data in the TM system. Transportation zones can group locations and other zones and can include one-time locations. Transportation zones can include zones within their locations and sub-zones. For example, all locations that are supplied by the same warehouse (individual locations and transportation zones) are grouped into a transportation zone. If SAP ERP integration through the CIF is used, transportation zones are automatically created from the address of the location. The location is automatically assigned to the transportation zone. Types of Transportation Zones
Transportation zones in SAP TM are mixed zones. This means that the assignment of locations to transportation zones can be static (in the case of a direct assignment) or dynamic (in the case of an assignment done by region or postal code).
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
The Assignment of Locations to Transportation Zones can be: Direct Based on Region Based on Postal Code -3 Assignment based on region/postal code is relevant for one-time locations Mixed Assignment methods are allowed for each transportation zone Figure 48: Assignment of Locations to Transportation Zones
Transportation Zones: Region or Country
M ain ta in Zone
2 9iow
r|
t___________ 1 a . S B lZ M ji a a j f u
- 4 a ? a Mo... Zone Sr us-a.
? .
a .
Rhd
TransportationZoneNa * us- il
,E
Descrpoon linos
longitude
Mn
87
30
Zone - Location
Zone - Postal Code
- - ini ftHBW; A^Msar*.:frfcCouitrv Key Country Name US
Sec ♦ 32 O
USA
(j/
latitude
Mn
41
32
Sec
♦
| Open;
Proasxn Type
3N
R
Zone - Reger
tayi-3, e Region H
Region Name O ncn
Figure 49: Regional Zones
In a regional zone, locations are specified by a country or region. For example, the state of Illinois can be defined as its own zone. In the figure, the zone US-lllinois is created and only Illinois is assigned to it.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Assignment Based on Region
The figure shows a detailed view of zone assignment based on region in SAP TM. Transportation Zones: Postal Codes
Transportation zones can be defined by the use of postal codes. Companies can use zip/postal code or zip/postal code ranges to define these geographical areas.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Most major U.S. truck-load and less-than-truck-load carriers publish their rate structures and transit time tables based on origin and destination three-digit zip code lanes rather than city or state level lanes. In these documents, carriers use ranges of three-digit zip codes, such as 170-173. To define a postal code zone, you create entries on the tab page labeled Postal Code. Transportation Zones: Direct
In a direct assignment, locations are assigned directly to a zone. For example, a particular customer might be in a zone that has low volumes. By including them in a zone with a larger geography, you might improve the optimization results. Transportation Zones: Mixed You can use any combination of these types of transportation zones when defining a zone. This is a called a mixed zone. Calculating Transportation Zone Coordinates
Longitude 88
Mn 32
Sec + 34 0
Latitude 41
Mn 57
Sec ♦ 37 N
Precision Type C M
Figure 53: Calculating Tzone Coordinates
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Transportation zones are not physical locations and therefore do not have an address. Transportation zones can also be assigned geographical coordinates. SAP TM offers two options for calculating these coordinates. After defining the locations, regions or postal codes, the system can calculate the coordinates. This estimates the center point of the zone based on the coordinates of all locations included in the zone. Alternatively, identify the geographical coordinates and manually enter them in TM. Transportation Zone Hierarchies The definition of a transportation zone is different for each user or company. For example, consumer products companies that plan their own transportation may have thousands of customers and ship-tos. The volume of master data is still significant, even with transportation zones.
Continent
Location
Country
5 Digit Zip
Region
3 Digit Zip
State
City Figure 54: Transportation Zones Hierarchy
Transportation Zone Hierarchy Creation
Transportation zones can be created by integration via CIF or manually in TM. The functionality to maintain transportation zones in TM is more sophisticated than the functionality in SAP ERP. In TM your company can define different levels of transportation zones. These zones may form a natural hierarchy. Unlike SAP ERP, TM uses this natural hierarchy to create a transportation zone hierarchy to improve master data maintenance. The figure. Transportation Zone Hierarchy, shows that the Midwest and Southeast customers do not need to be directly assigned to zone USA. All Midwest and Southeast customers are part of zone USA through inheritance from lower-level zone assignment. Locations can be assigned to zones at any level.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Transportation Zone Hierarchy Organization
Organizing transportation zones into transportation zone hierarchies allows you to transfer the properties of the higher level transportation zone to the locations on lower levels of the hierarchy. Transportation zone hierarchies reduce the amount of master data to be maintained in TM: •
A zone can be assigned to any number of higher-level zones
•
Locations can be assigned to any number of zones
•
A zone cannot be assigned to a location
You cannot assign a transportation zone to itself or to a zone already assigned to the same zone. Transportation Zone Hierarchy Definition
The SAP TM-relevant transportation zone hierarchy can be defined in customizing. Choose the menu path Transportation Management —> Transportation Network —> Define Transportation Zone Hierarchy. Transportation zone hierarchies can include locations and transportation zones.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
North America
Continent
—>
Central America South America Canada
Country
Mexico
United States
Region
South Southeast Southwest
North Northeast Northwest
State
Iowa
Illinois Indiana
City
Hierarchy - Change Objects ^ O ls p la v
a
a*
CtJC opy
i^ W i tfsi.oa
H e rarch y -
eft Model
c3 • CD • CD
- C3 CD
t_J CD CD CD CD
T ra n sp o rtati... RELH ZONE NA CA MX US US MIDWEST US-MOUNTAIN US-NORTHEAST US-SOUTH US-SOUTI-CAST US-WEST
2 2
Midwest
Michigan Minnesota North Dakota
Chicago
Nebraska Ohio South Dakota Wisconsin
Rockford Quad Cities
!
Z o n e D escription Um ladehier archie N o rth Am erica C anada Mexico US Z o n e M idw estern US S ta te s M ountain US s ta te s N o rth e a s t US s ta te s S o u th e rn US s t a t e s S o u th e a s t US s t a t e s W e s te rn US s ta te s
3 Digit Zip
60600 - 60699
5 Digit Zip
60601- 1000 ■ 60601 -1500
-=► | Location C U S T00-16
Figure 56: Transportation Zone Hierarchy (2)
Transportation Zone Hierarchy Maintenance
The assignment of transportation zones to other transportation zones is maintained in SAP TM. Choose Master Data —► Transportation Network —*• Define Transportation Zone Hierarchy.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Exercise 9 Define Transportation Zones
Business Example
As locations are created via the CIF integration and others are created in TM, design transportation zones to support planning for both inbound and outbound scenarios. To minimize master data maintenance, create a master data relationship that allows transportation rules at a high level to cascade down to regional levels by defining transportation zone hierarchies. 1. Create transportation zone US-MIDWEST-##, with a description Grp # # Midwest Zone, which includes the states IL - Illinois, IN - Indiana, and ND- North Dakota. 2. To identify the center of your new region, calculate the longitude and latitude for this new location, US-MIDWEST-##. 3. Create transportation zone US-MOUNTAIN-##, with a description Grp## Mountain Zone, which includes the states AZ-Arizona, CO-Colorado, UT-Utah. 4. To identify the center of your new region, calculate the longitude and latitude for this new location, US-Mountain-##. 5. Create transportation zone US-WEST-##, with a description Grp # # West Zone, which includes the states CA-California, and WA-Washington. 6. To identify the center of your new region, calculate the longitude and latitude for this new location, US-WEST-##. 7. Create transportation zone US-SOUTH-##, with a description Grp # # South Zone, which includes the states LA-Louisiana, and TX-Texas. 8. To identify the center of your new region, calculate the longitude and latitude for this new location, US-South -##. 9. Create transportation zone US-SouthEast-##, with a description Grp # # SouthEast Zone, which includes the states FL-Florida, GA, Georgia, KY-Kentucky, and TN-Tennessee. 10. To identify the center of your new region, calculate the longitude and latitude for this new location, US-SouthEast -##. 11. Create transportation zone US-##, with a description Grp # # US Zone, to represent a zone for the United States. 12. To ship products domestically, there are certain resources at your company's disposal, regardless of origin and destination. To make the master data maintenance easier, create a zone hierarchy called US-##, with a description of GRP # # US Zone. In this hierarchy, attach the following zones that you created previously: US-MIDWEST-##, US-WEST-##, USSOUTH-##, US-SOUTHEAST-##, and US-WEST-##. When defining a means of transport, this allows these regions to inherit the master data maintained at a country level. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Solution 9 Define Transportation Zones
Business Example
As locations are created via the CIF integration and others are created in TM, design transportation zones to support planning for both inbound and outbound scenarios. To minimize master data maintenance, create a master data relationship that allows transportation rules at a high level to cascade down to regional levels by defining transportation zone hierarchies. 1. Create transportation zone US-MIDWEST-##, with a description Grp # # Midwest Zone, which includes the states IL - Illinois, IN - Indiana, and ND- North Dakota. a) In NWBC choose Master Data —*• Transportation Network —► Transportation Zones —>Define Transportation Zone. b) Choose Create. c) Enter the zone us-MiDWEST-##, with a description Grp ## Midwest Zone. d) Select Continue. e) Select the Zone-Region tab and choose Create. f) In the Country field, enter u s . g) In the Region field, enter i l and choose Enter to accept. h) Continue through any warnings. i) In the Zone- Region tab, choose Create, and enter the remaining regions/states (IN, ND). j) Select Save when all regions and states are added. 2. To identify the center of your new region, calculate the longitude and latitude for this new location, US-MIDWEST-##. a) Select the new zone US-Midwest-##, and choose Calculate Coordinates. b) Choose Save. 3. Create transportation zone US-MOUNTAIN-##, with a description Grp## Mountain Zone, which includes the states AZ-Arizona, CO-Colorado, UT-Utah. a) Choose Create. b) Enter US-MOUNTAIN-##, with a description Grp## Mountain Zone. c) Choose Continue. d) Select the Zone-Region tab and choose Create.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
e) In the Country field, enter us and in the Region field enter a
.
z
f) Continue through any warnings. g) Choose Create, and enter the remaining regions and states. h) Choose Save when all regions and states are added. 4. To identify the center of your new region, calculate the longitude and latitude for this new location, US-Mountain-##. a) Select the new zone US-Mountain-##, and choose Calculate Coordinates. b) Choose Save. 5. Create transportation zone US-WEST-##, with a description Grp # # West Zone, which includes the states CA-California, and WA-Washington. a) Choose Create. b) Enter US- w e s t -##, with a description Grp ## West Zone . c) Choose Continue. d) Select the Zone-Region tab and choose Create. e) In the Country field, enter us and in the Region field enter c
a
.
f) Continue through any warnings. g) Choose Create, and enter the remaining regions and states (WA). h) Choose Save when all regions and states are added. 6. To identify the center of your new region, calculate the longitude and latitude for this new location, US-WEST-##. a) Select the new zone US-WEST-##, and choose Calculate Coordinates. b) Choose Save. 7. Create transportation zone US-SOUTH-##, with a description Grp # # South Zone, which includes the states LA-Louisiana, and TX-Texas. a) Choose Create. b) Enter US-South-##, with a description Grp ## South Zone. c) Choose Continue. d) Select the Zone-Region tab and choose Create. e) In the Country field, enter us and in the Region field enter
l a
.
f) Continue through any warnings g) Choose Create, and enter the remaining regions and states (TX). h) Choose Save when all regions and states are added.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
8. To identify the center of your new region, calculate the longitude and latitude for this new location, US-South -##. a) Select the new zone US-South-##, and choose Calculate Coordinates. b) Choose Save. 9. Create transportation zone US-SouthEast-##, with a description Grp # # SouthEast Zone, which includes the states FL-Florida, GA, Georgia, KY-Kentucky, and TN-Tennessee. a) Choose Create. b) Enter US-SOUTHEAST-##, with a description Grp ## SouthEast Zone c) Choose Continue. d) Select the Zone-Region tab and choose Create. e) In the Country field, enter us and in the Region field enter f
l
.
f) Continue through any warnings. g) Choose Create, and enter the remaining regions and states (GA, KY, TN). h) Choose Save when all regions and states are added. 10. To identify the center of your new region, calculate the longitude and latitude for this new location, US-SouthEast -##. a) Select the new zone US-SouthEast-##, and choose Calculate Coordinates. b) Choose Save. 11. Create transportation zone US-##, with a description Grp # # US Zone, to represent a zone for the United States. a) Choose Create. b) Enter us-##, with a description Grp ## us Zone. c) Choose Continue. d) Choose Save. 12. To ship products domestically, there are certain resources at your company’s disposal, regardless of origin and destination. To make the master data maintenance easier, create a zone hierarchy called US-##, with a description of GRP # # US Zone. In this hierarchy, attach the following zones that you created previously: US-MIDWEST-##, US-WEST-##, USSOUTH-##, US-SOUTHEAST-##, and US-WEST-##. When defining a means of transport, this allows these regions to inherit the master data maintained at a country level. a) In NWBC, choose Master Data —*• Transportation Network —► Transportation Zones —>Define Transportation Zone Hierarchy. b) In the Hierarchy Name field, enter r
e l h
_
z o n e
and choose Change.
c) In the hierarchy displayed on the lower half of the screen, choose the RELH_ZONE node to display the child nodes in the upper half of the screen.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
d) In the Transportation Zone list, enter transportation zone US-##, and choose save to adopt the US Transportation Zone node. e) When asked to adopt and update the tree, choose Yes. f) In the hierarchy, US-## is displayed. Choose the US-## node. g) In the Hierarchy Fast Entry screen area, enter the following zone names: u s -m i d w e s t ##,US-WEST-##, US-MOUNTAIN-##, US-SOUTHEAST-##, and US-SOUTH-##. h) Choose Transfer to insert zones into the hierarchy. i) Save your data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Create transportation zones
•
Create transportation zone hierarchies
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Lesson 4 Defining Methods of Transportation
LESSON OVERVIEW When you define a transportation network, your company must identify all the different locations that ship and receive products. To support planning, you must determine the distance, duration, and cost of transporting products between these locations.
In this lesson, you identify how modes and means of transport can help your organization frame its transportation network in more detail. At the end of this lesson, you will have a detailed understanding of the means of transport hierarchy. You will be able to define the means and modes of transport in SAP TM. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Define transportation modes
•
Define means of transport
Transportation Mode When all shipping and receiving locations are defined, frame how you intend to ship products between these locations. The complexity of your shipping scenarios influences how much detail you need to maintain. For example, consider whether products are shipped over road, rail, or waterways. Transportation Modes
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
The first configuration step in the transportation process is to identify the transportation modes that can be used to move products. The transportation mode describes the highest-level transport grouping, for example, road, rail, inland waterway, sea, or air. The SAP ERP mode of transport corresponds to the SAP TM transportation mode. Each method of transport is assigned a single transportation mode. Transportation Mode Categories
SAP has defined the four following transportation mode categories: road, rail, sea, or air. In addition to the transportation mode category, companies can assign a dangerous goods transport category. This signals that you may have to ship certain chemicals under pressure and only certain ways of transporting the product are suitable. This category is also defined in Customizing for SAP TM. These categories define the type of transport to be used. Category 99 (all modes) is used in the U.S. according to dangerous goods regulation 49 CFR. Customers can use categories 30 - 89 for their own definition. The Main Carriage The transportation mode can be set as the Main Carriage. The reference to the main carriage indicates that this segment of transportation is the primary segment. When dealing with export scenarios, you may have the pre-carriage, main carriage, and on-carriage. In a multi-modal or multi-stage shipment, the main carriage stage contains all of the shipment documents. It also allows pre- and on-carriage stages to be linked to it. These transportation modes can be used at a high level to determine incompatibilities.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Means of Transport
Figure 58: Means of Transport
When you define the various transportation modes, your company can further define the transportation process by creating and assigning different means of transport. The means of transport describes the characteristics of specific vehicle types or classifications that transport goods, such as a non-refrigerated truck, a refrigerated truck, a 60-foot rail boxcar, or a bulk container. Assigning Vehicle Resources to a Means of Transport The network can be expanded by defining vehicle resources and assigning them to a means of transport. Vehicle resources in a means of transport have a common set of physical characteristics that are taken into account during the planning process. These physical characteristics include the mode of transportation (air, rail, surface, or sea), vehicle capacity, speed, cost structure, geographic availability, and temperature control. Whether a companyowned fleet can be used to group vehicles in a means of transport is also a consideration. Means of transport also allow a company to describe the cost structure and geographical availability of a class of vehicle. Means of Transport Settings
There are a number of means of transport settings: •
Transportation mode
•
Multi-resource
•
Scheduled means of transport
•
Own means of transport
•
GIS quality
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Means of Transport Definition
You can define the means of transport in Customizing for SAP TM. Choose SAP Transportation Management —*• Transportation Management —> Master data —*■ Resources —> Define Means of Transport. Transportation Mode Assignment
Within the means of transport you can assign a transportation mode. This specifies how a product is transported, for example, by road, rail, sea, or air. You use the means of transport to select the vehicle resources that are to execute the transportation. The standard code assigned to means of transport represents the official representation of type of transport. The UN/EDIFACT standard uses the following codes: •
006 - Aircraft
•
O il-S h ip
•
031-Truck
•
038 - Car
The relevant settings are: •
Scheduled means of transport: This defines if a resource is traveling based on a fixed schedule such as a sailing or rail schedule.
•
Own means of transport: This determines if a resource is part of your own fleet or that of an external provider.
Multi-Resource
4 8 ft T ractor Trailer
10,20 or unlimited /\
Figure 59: Multi Resource
Instead of creating individual resources for a means of transport, you can select the MultiResource checkbox for the means of transport. During planning, the system assumes the For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
availability of the number of resources you define. If you do not specify a number in this field, the system assumes that an unlimited number of resources are available. During vehicle scheduling and pre-processing, the number of resources that you define in this field indicates the maximum number of parallel freight orders that the system is allowed to create for each resource. Duration In terstate H ig h w ay
Fast - 70 M ph
M edium - 55 Mph
S lo w - 4 0 Mph
Figure 60: Speeds
Duration is one of the key elements to consider when dealing with different means of transport. This can be influenced by the type of transport as well as the quality or type of transportation infrastructure used. Selecting the G/S Quality checkbox means your organization is integrating with a third party geographical information system. This integration is specific about which routes (interstate highways or county road) are used. Anticipated speeds for the different types of highways or roads that may be used can be defined.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Distance and Speed
Figure 61: Distance Factor and Average Speed
If you choose not to integrate with a GIS, you still differentiate duration for different means of transport. Within each means of transport you can specify an average speed. The speed is then used, along with the distance from the transportation lane, to calculate transit duration. The distance factor establishes the difference between the linear distance between two locations and the actual distance covered by the vehicle. Based on the linear distance, you can use this factor to estimate the actual travel distance for a vehicle between two locations. Together with the average speed, you can estimate the transportation time. Schedule
Due to the size or limitation of loading and unloading facilities, certain means of transport may not be as readily available as others. Acquiring trucking resources is not as complex as scheduling an export shipment that travels internationally. When dealing with ocean freight, there For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
are specific departure times for a vessel due to limited port facilities or the cost of using those limited facilities. By selecting the Schedule Means of Transport checkbox, you are indicating that other master data called a schedule is used. This schedule identifies a validity period, a means of transport, a start stop, and a destination stop. Periodic departures can be maintained in the schedule. This would typically be used with ocean, air freight, or specific types of rail movements. Passive Means of Transport
Figure 63: Passive
In scenarios where resources are limited, you may need to separate equipment and define them as two separate means of transport. For example, a tractor can haul 48 and 53 foot trailers, in addition to 20 and 40 foot containers. While the trailers and tractors may be readily available, the containers may have limited availability. You can define the containers as a separate means of transport. However, by defining the container means of transport as Passive, you are indicating to TM that you cannot move the container without assigning a tractor means of transport.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
No Capacity, No Load
In the previous scenario where you modeled the tractor and containers as separate means of transport, the focus was on the container not being able to move by itself. During planning, you model the container resources as having a limited capacity. In the case of the tractor, there is no associated capacity, volume, or mass. However, during VSR planning it is necessary to determine if you have enough tractors to pull all the trailers or containers. When modeling this situation, you identify that the tractor has No Capacity in the means of transport. This indicates that during VSR optimization, the number of tractors, and not capacity, is relevant. No Direct Load D ire c t Load
Figure 65: No Direct Load
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
A vehicle resource representing both a tractor and a trailer is called direct loading. This is a third scenario when multiple means of transport are required to move a single load. If a means of transport is defined as road, you are not limited by the number of tractors but only by the number of loads that can be executed in a day. During VSR planning, the system sees it as one resource rather than two (direct loading). When dealing with two means of transport, you want the VSR optimizer to first assign the container and then assign the tractor during planning. When you select No Direct Load in the means of transportation, you are indicating that the VSR optimizer does not take into account the resources that are assigned to this means of transport. In this case, you might not want to consider the tractor as a constraint. Means of Transport Hierarchy
Figure 66: Relationships between Transportation Mode, Means of Transport, and Vehicle: An Example
TM allows flexibility in an organization's definition of transportation constraints. As outlined in the figure Relationships between Transportation Mode, Means of Transport, and Vehicle: An Example, for cost purposes there is a need to define three different means of transport. There may be a cost difference between these different methods, and a difference in duration. Additional Considerations Choosing to transport by road may require the consideration of additional factors. For example, produce may need to go in a refrigerated trailer. The distance is the same as in a 53 foot truck, but the cost is different due to the need to keep the trailer at a certain temperature. You may not be able to ship other products this way: their packaging may not be protected against moisture and could be damaged if shipped on this method. When dealing with dry goods, there may be little if any cost difference between a 53 foot and a 48 foot trailer. However, there is a difference in the capacity or amount of product that can be shipped. There may also be a difference in the width of one 53 foot trailer versus another. If you are shipping light weight products, then the capacity dimension mass may not be as important as volume. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Means of Transport and Geography
Once defined, the means of transport are assigned to transportation lanes. As your company creates vehicle resources, they are also assigned to a means of transport. This links resource availability to the geography of the supply network. Means of transport costs are also defined in the transportation lane that aids the VSR optimizer in planning. Where applicable, carriers that can handle vehicles for the means of transport are assigned to the transportation lane. How carrier selection is performed for this means of transport is also defined in the transportation lane.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Create a Means of Transport
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to configure appropriate customizing settings required for transportation planning. During planning it is imperative to identify if your organization has different options to choose from when shipping products between locations. These options impact the transportation costs and delivery dates based on different transit times. In Customizing, create the means of transport to distinguish different ways of moving product through your network. 1. In Customizing for SAP TM, view all the means of transportation defined in the system. 2. Create a new means of transport FTL-##. This new means of transport has multiple resources and should use GIS quality. Use the following data: Field
Value
Means of Transport
FTL-##
MTr Description
FTL-##
Standard Code
031
Transp. Mode
Road
Average Speed
80
Distance Factor
1,00
3. Create a new means of transport LTL-##. This new means of transport has multiple resources and should also use GIS quality. Use the following data: Field
Value
Means of Transport
LTL-##
MTr Description
LTL-##
Standard Code
031
Transp. Mode
Road
Average Speed
65
Distance Factor
1,00
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Create a Means of Transport
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to configure appropriate customizing settings required for transportation planning. During planning it is imperative to identify if your organization has different options to choose from when shipping products between locations. These options impact the transportation costs and delivery dates based on different transit times. In Customizing, create the means of transport to distinguish different ways of moving product through your network. 1. In Customizing for SAP TM, view all the means of transportation defined in the system. a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management —> Transportation Management —> Master Data —> Resources —► Define Means of Transport. b) View all available means of transportation codes in the system. Familiarize yourself with the information required to maintain a means of transport. 2. Create a new means of transport FTL-##. This new means of transport has multiple resources and should use GIS quality. Use the following data: Field
Value
Means of Transport
FTL-##
MTr Description
FTL-##
Standard Code
031
Transp. Mode
Road
Average Speed
80
Distance Factor
1,00
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management —> Transportation Management —*• Master Data —> Resources —> Define Means of Transport. b) To create a new means of transport, choose New Entries. c) Enter the data from the table. d) Select the Multiresource checkbox. e) Select the GIS quality checkbox.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
f) Save your data. g) Continue through any warning messages. 3. Create a new means of transport LTL-##. This new means of transport has multiple resources and should also use GIS quality. Use the following data: Field
Value
Means of Transport
LTL-##
MTr Description
LTL-##
Standard Code
031
Transp. Mode
Road
Average Speed
65
Distance Factor
1,00
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management —> Transportation Management —> Master Data —*■ Resources —► Define Means of Transport. b) Choose New Entries to create a new means of transport. c) Enter the data from the table. d) Select the Multiresource checkbox. e) Select the GIS quality checkbox. f) Save your data. g) Continue through any warning messages. Your data will be recorded in a transport means to be promoted to other environments.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Define transportation modes
•
Define means of transport
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Lesson 5 Defining Transportation Lanes
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson we examine how the modeling of a transportation lane is a critical component of your transportation network.
At the end of this lesson, you will be able to identify the data that needs to be defined to create and maintain a transportation lane. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Create a transportation lane
•
Examine transportation lane application during transportation planning
Transportation Lane Usage To model the enterprise supply chain network, it is important to understand how the various sources and destinations of material flows are connected to form the network. The object used to make these connections in the supply chain network is the transportation lane. The tran s p o rta tio n lane co ntro ls how goods can be tra n s p o rte d from one location to another. T ran spo rtatio n lanes play a key role in SAP TM . T h ey control: ■
W h ich location c a n fo rw a rd goods to a n o th e r location W h ic h m eans o f tra n s p o rt can be used to do so W h ich c a rrie r can su pp ly a veh icle fo r th e m eans o f tran s p o rt
Transportation Lane w Figure 67: Transportation Lane
A transportation lane in SAP TM represents a direct route between two locations. It is used to source and transport products between them. Each lane is defined by its source and target locations, depending on the direction of traffic. A transportation lane has to exist between the two locations to transfer products in the supply chain. Transportation lanes are created in SAP TM for this reason.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Transportation Lane Details •
Transportation Lane
•
Means of Transport
•
Carrier
From ■♦T o - ♦ Validity - ♦ Distance - ♦ Duration Carrier Selection Relevance - ♦ Carrier Selection Settings Priority - ♦ Internal Cost " ♦ Tendering Settings
Figure 68: Transportation Lane Details
In the SAP ERP sales and distribution and logistics execution applications there is an organizational element, the route. It represents an itinerary connecting a shipping point and a customer ship-to address. Although the route definition in the SAP ERP system contains some delivery and shipment planning data, the transfer of route-related information is not performed for SAP TM. The SAP TM transportation lane master data is more precise and flexible for use in the VSR optimizer.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Create Transportation Lanes
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create the transportation lanes required for transportation planning.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercises Examine Location Masters, Define Transportation Zones, and Create a Means of Transport.
1. Create an intra-zone transportation lane for your zone US-## that will represent your default means of transport for all domestic road means of transport for your transportation network. This will include the means of transport FTL-## to which you will assign a cost of 1.25 per KM. 2. Assign the business partners CAR##-01 and CAR##-02 to your means of transport FTL-## to represent which carriers can service your full truckload needs for the entire USA. For carrier CAR##-01 assign a cost of .45 per KM , and a priority of 1 for carrier selection. For CAR##-02, assign a cost of .55 per KM , and a priority of 2 for carrier selection. 3. The origin of your LTL shipments will be shipping point SP3100. Create a location to zone transportation lane for your location SP3100 to US-Southeast-##. This lane will consist of means of transport LTL-##, to which you will assign a transportation cost of .01 per LB. 4. To determine how long this means of transport might take, update your transportation lane by calculating the distance and duration between the locations. 5. What was the distance and duration?
6. Traveling LTL from SP3100 (Chicago area) to the southeast region will take longer than the 13 hours and 34 minutes that was calculated, because this method will not be shipping directly. Because it is likely to go through one or more consolidation and deconsolidation locations, you must add a more realistic time. Overwrite the duration with a fixed duration of 120 hours, assuming the longest possible distance (Florida). 7. Assign the business partners CAR##-03 and CAR##-04 to your means of transport LTL-## to represent the carriers that can service your less than truckload needs. Assign a cost of 0,18 per KG for carrier CAR##-03, and a priority of 1 for carrier selection. Assign a cost of 0,22 per
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected] 147
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
KG for CAR##-04, and a priority of 2 for carrier selection. Consider both for Peer-to-Peer with priority 1 and 2 respectively. 8. Create more lanes between your shipping zone and the other destination zones. Create lanes from your shipping point 3100 to the following zones: US-South-##, US-Midwest-## USMountain-##, and US-West-##, using the mass create function and using the transportation lane between SP3100 and US-SOUTHEAST-## as a template. 9. Because the new lanes are modeling the LTL-## means of transport, you must update the new lanes with a more appropriate duration. Using the mass maintenance feature, update your four new lanes with the following durations: •
SP3100 to US-Midwest-## = 48 hours
•
SP3100 to US-Mountain-## = 96 hours
.
SP3100 to US-South-## = 72 hours
.
SP3100 to US-West-## = 144 hours
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Create Transportation Lanes
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create the transportation lanes required for transportation planning.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercises Examine Location Masters, Define Transportation Zones, and Create a Means of Transport.
1. Create an intra-zone transportation lane for your zone US-## that will represent your default means of transport for all domestic road means of transport for your transportation network. This will include the means of transport FTL-## to which you will assign a cost of 1.25 per KM. a) In NWBC, choose Master Data —*• Transportation Network —> Transportation Lanes —> Define Transportation Lane. b) Choose the Intra Zone Lane tab c) In the Loc /Transport. Loc field, enter US-##. d) To create a new lane, choose Create. e) In the Panel for Means of Transport, choose Create. f) Enter the MOT data as follows: .
Means of Transport: FTL-##
.
Validity Start Date: Beginning of current year
.
Validity End Date: 31.12.9999
.
Mns of Trsp. Costs: 1,25
g) Select the Relevant to Carrier Selection checkbox. h) From the Priority/Costs dropdown menu, choose Costs. i) From the Cost Origin dropdown menu, choose Internal Cost. j) Choose Copy and Close. k) Save your data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected] © Copyright. All rights reserved.
0
149
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
2. Assign the business partners CAR##-01 and CAR##-02 to your means of transport FTL-## to represent which carriers can service your full truckload needs for the entire USA. For carrier CAR##-01 assign a cost of .45 per KM , and a priority of 1 for carrier selection. For CAR##-02, assign a cost of .55 per KM , and a priority of 2 for carrier selection. a) Highlight the means of transport FTL-##. b) In the Carrier screen area, choose Create. c) Assign business partner CAR##-01. d) Enter a cost of 0,45 per KM. e) Enter a priority of 1. f) Select the Consider Carrier for P2P Tendering checkbox.. g) In the Carrier Priority for P2P Tendering field, enter a priority of 1. h) Choose Create and Copy. i) Highlight your means of transport FTL-##. j) In the Carrier screen area choose Create. k) Assign business partner CAR##-02. l)
Enter a Transportation Cost of 0,55 per KM
m) Enter a priority of 2 n) Select the Consider Carrier for P2P Tendering checkbox.. o) Choose Create and Copy. p) Choose Save. 3. The origin of your LTL shipments will be shipping point SP3100. Create a location to zone transportation lane for your location SP3100 to US-Southeast-##. This lane will consist of means of transport LTL-##, to which you will assign a transportation cost of .01 per LB. a) NWBC path Master Data —*■ Transportation Network —*• Transportation Lanes —> Define Transportation Lane. b) In the Tr. Lane tab, in the Start Location/Zone field, enter SP3100. c) In the Dest. Loc/Zone field, enter US-SouthEast-##. d) To create a new lane, choose Create. e) In the panel for Means of Transport, choose Create. f) Enter the MOT data as follows: .
Means of Transport: LTL-##
•
Validity Start Date: Beginning of current year
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
.
Validity End Date: 31.12.9999
.
Transportation Cost: 0,10 per LB
•
Select the Relevant to Carrier Selection checkbox.
.
From the Priority / Costs dropdown menu, choose Costs.
.
From the Cost Origin dropdown menu, choose Internal Cost.
•
Choose Copy and Close
.
Choose Save
4. To determine how long this means of transport might take, update your transportation lane by calculating the distance and duration between the locations. a) Choose Generate Proposal. 5. What was the distance and duration? The distance was approximately 882 kilometers, with a duration of 13.34,_________________ 6. Traveling LTL from SP3100 (Chicago area) to the southeast region will take longer than the 13 hours and 34 minutes that was calculated, because this method will not be shipping directly. Because it is likely to go through one or more consolidation and deconsolidation locations, you must add a more realistic time. Overwrite the duration with a fixed duration of 120 hours, assuming the longest possible distance (Florida). a) In the Trsp. Duration field, overwrite the calculated value with 120:00. b) In the Control Indicator screen area, select both the checkboxes for Fix Transportation Duration and Fix Trsp. Distance c) Choose Copy and Close. d) Choose Save. 7. Assign the business partners CAR##-03 and CAR##-04 to your means of transport LTL-## to represent the carriers that can service your less than truckload needs. Assign a cost of 0,18 per KG for carrier CAR##-03, and a priority of 1 for carrier selection. Assign a cost of 0,22 per KG for CAR##-04, and a priority of 2 for carrier selection. Consider both for Peer-to-Peer with priority 1 and 2 respectively. a) Highlight your means of transport LTL-##, and in the Carrier screen area choose Create. b) Assign business partner CAR##-03 c) Enter a cost of 0,18 per KG d) Enter a priority of 1 e) Select the Consider Carrier for P2P Tendering checkbox. f) Enter a priority of 1 g) Choose Create and Copy
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
h) Highlight your means of transport LTL-##, and in the carrier screen area choose Create. i) Assign business partner CAR##-04 j) Enter a cost of 0,22 per KG k) Enter a priority of 2 l)
Choose Create and Copy
m) Choose Save. 8. Create more lanes between your shipping zone and the other destination zones. Create lanes from your shipping point 3100 to the following zones: US-South-##, US-Midwest-## USMountain-##, and US-West-##, using the mass create function and using the transportation lane between SP3100 and US-SOUTHEAST-## as a template. a) Open the Master Data folder. b) Choose Transportation Network —► Transportation Lanes —> Define Transportation Lane. c) Choose the Mass Maint. (Create) tab. d) In the Copy From screen area enter the Start Location/Zone SP3100 and Destination Location/Zone US-Southeast-##. e) In the Transportation Lanes Between Location screen area, enter Start Location/Zone SP3100
f) In the Destination Location/Zone field, enter US-South-##. g) Choose multiple selection and enter US-MOUNTAIN-##, US-Midwest-##, and US-West## h) Select the Existing Transportation Lanes are Overwritten radio button. i) Select the Calculate Transport Durations and Distances radio button. j) Choose Create. k) Answer Yes to create the Four transportation lanes 9. Because the new lanes are modeling the LTL-## means of transport, you must update the new lanes with a more appropriate duration. Using the mass maintenance feature, update your four new lanes with the following durations: •
SP3100 to US-Midwest-## = 48 hours
•
SP3100 to US-Mountain-## = 96 hours
.
SP3100 to US-South-## = 72 hours
.
SP3100 to US-West-## = 144 hours
a) Go to the Mass Maint. (Display/Change) tab. b) In the Start Location/Zone field, enter SP3100.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
c) In the Destination Location/zone field, enter US-*-##. d) Choose Change. e) Update the MTr for your LTL-## for each lane. f) Select the Fix Transportation Duration and Fix Trsp. Distance check boxes. g) Update the lanes with the following durations: •
SP3100 to US-Midwest-## = 48 hours
•
SP3100 to US-Mountain-## = 96 hours
.
SP3100 to US-South-## = 72 hours
.
SP3100 to US-West-## = 144 hours
h) Save your data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Distance Duration Determination (DDD) Vehicle-supported business processes such as transportation planning must deliver services rapidly and cost-effectively. Reliable routing information supports transportation planning by providing the shortest driving distance between a start and destination location. Hard constraints such as height or weight restrictions of the vehicle used are taken into account. Duration information may also be required for scheduling. It can be calculated based on distance and speed parameters of the deployed means of transport. The Transportation Lane In SAP TM, the transportation lane master data object links two locations. The transportation lane stores distance and duration information for each means of transport assignment. This information can be determined by calculating a straight-line distance, taking into account the spherical shape of the earth, and a deviation factor specific to the means of transport. The actual area in between is ignored. If this does not fulfill business process requirements regarding accuracy, it is possible to determine distances and durations using an external provider or GIS.
W ith GIS By co nn ectin g the GIS, d is ta n c e and duration tim e can be c a lc u la te d fo r each m eans o f tra n s p o rt w ith in a tran s p o rta tio n lane using e x a c t road d etails.
Figure 69: Distance Duration Calculation
Distances and Durations between two SCM Locations
Distances and durations between two SCM locations are calculated when the transportation lane is created. The user can trigger a re-determination manually or overwrite the values. The values of external determinations are buffered for each location pair. SAP TM retrieves distances at the time of planning either from the buffer table or based on the defined strategy. Corresponding transportation lanes are generated between all locations assigned to the transportation zones. Cost information is taken from the transportation lanes maintained. Distance and duration are calculated according to the settings; they can also be taken from the maintained transportation lane. The maintained distance in the master transportation lane includes a factor for street map variability that is obtained from the means of transport. This factor establishes the proportion
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
between the linear distance between two locations and the actual distance covered by the vehicle transporting goods between them. GIS System Included in the means of transport is the average speed of the transport method. The runtime distance is divided by the average speed to calculate the estimated duration. If an external geographical information system is used to calculate distances, they are stored in a separate buffer table and are not calculated at runtime. You can flag if this means of transport is calculated by a GIS system. If the flag is not set, the aerial distance is used. If the GIS flag is set, the low, medium, or high speed is used. GIS systems typically categorize streets as slow, medium, or fast. Buffering Distances and Durations Based on Coordinates
In SAP TM 8.0, the distance between two locations was determined based on the most accurate geo-coordinates, even if this accuracy was not required. This concept leads to a high number of determinations when running mass processes. To support large-scale scenarios, it is possible with EHP1 to configure optionally the DDD to use coordinates based on geo-coding levels to balance accuracy and performance. To support this new concept, distances and durations are now buffered based on coordinates. It is possible to connect to different GIS providers for geo-coding using the process controller framework.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Transportation Lane Master Data
The transportation lane can be maintained as master data. From the SAP TM main menu, choose Master Data->Transportation Network->Define Transportation Lane. For each means of transportation, distances and durations can be calculated in a batch job using the GIS server or manually in lane maintenance. On completion of the batch jobs, the durations and distances are stored in a buffer table. If a location is added or modified, this background job is executed again to update the GIS information. Process Controller
As part of enhancement package one (EHP 1) for SAP SCM 7.0, geo-routing has been enhanced with the following features: •
Usage of Process Controller
•
Process specific Distance and Duration Determination
•
Performance improvements for Distance and Duration Determination (DDD)
You can create different Process Controller Routing strategies that link to different GIS vendor products: this enables flexible connections. Distance and Duration Determination is handled separately and with its own strategies. The created Process Controller strategies for DDD can be used to fulfill different requirements of business processes. For example, if a particular means of transport requires a different DDD, this can be defined in customizing.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Geocoding Level 10: Region
Figure 72: Distance and Duration Determination Using Geocoding Level 10: Region
The geo-coordinates for the start and destination locations are stored at region level. Geocoding Level 20: Postal Code
Figure 73: Distance and Duration Determination Using Geocoding Level 20: Postal Code
The geo-coordinates for the start and destination locations are stored at postal code level.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Geocoding Level 30: House Number
Figure 74: Distance and Duration Determination Using Geocoding Level 30: House Number
The geo-coordinates for start and destination locations are stored at house number level. The system determines the distance and duration for all transportation lanes individually because the geo-coordinates of all destination locations are unique. The system therefore needs to call the DDD service four times.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Exercise 12 Calculate Durations and Distances using Transportation Lanes
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to calculate durations and distances using transportation lanes required for transportation planning.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Create Transportation Lanes.
1. Which levels can be used for geocoding, if no external GIS system is connected to SAP TM?
2. Why are distances buffered?
3. Can you use different strategies to obtain distances?
4. Why would you use different strategies to obtain distances based on the straight-line distance itself?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Solution 12 Calculate Durations and Distances using Transportation Lanes
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to calculate durations and distances using transportation lanes required for transportation planning.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Create Transportation Lanes.
1. Which levels can be used for geocoding, if no external GIS system is connected to SAP TM? SAPO offers geocoding based on country level and region level taken from the address. 2. Why are distances buffered? Distances are buffered because it is too time-consuming to retrieve distances from the external GIS system each time they are required.____________________________________ 3. Can you use different strategies to obtain distances? Yes. You can define different process controller strategies to define distances. Which strategy is called is determined in the customizing.__________________________________________ 4. Why would you use different strategies to obtain distances based on the straight-line distance itself? Based on the straight line distance, it may be sufficient to plan on different levels of granularity. For distribution within the city, you require the exact distances and duration. For transport between the east and west coast, distances determined based on zip codes may be sufficient.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Create a transportation lane
•
Examine transportation lane application during transportation planning
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Lesson 6 Creating Carrier Profiles
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, we examine the carrier profiles that must be maintained for successful automatic planning. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Examine the purpose of carrier profiles
•
Examine product and transportation groups
•
Examine equipment groups and equipment types
•
Create carrier profiles
Carrier Profiles Third-party logistics providers (3PLs) include freight forwarders, courier companies, and companies integrating and offering subcontracted logistics and transportation services. Among the services 3PLs provide are: transportation, warehousing, cross-docking, inventory management, packaging, and freight forwarding. Business Partners
Create business partner ’
■____ ________________________ ■
'
Assign partner role: Carrier '
' Create carrier profile
Figure 75: Transportation Service Provider: Required Settings
A business partner is a person, organization, group of persons, or group of organizations in which a company has a business interest. You can create and manage centrally your business partners (BPs) and the roles they assume for your company. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For this purpose, define the general data of the business partner once and assign BP roles to the business partner. Specific data is stored for each business partner role. Redundant data is not stored because the general data is independent of a business partner's function or of applicationspecific extensions. When you first create a business partner in the system, the BP role General Business Partner is automatically assigned to the business partner. Carrier Integration
E R P master data
■ Vendor (carrier)
✓\
Figure 76: Transportation Service Provider: Integration ERP to TM
In an integrated SAP ERP and SAP TM system landscape, the ERP system is frequently the leading master data system. In this case, the customer and supplier master data is maintained in the ERP system. It is transferred from there to SAP TM using the SAP CIF as locations and business partners. For carriers, (vendors with a specific account group), business partner data can be created in SAP TM through CIF. The CIF integration model must be set up to create business partners. In business transaction documents, the BP master data object appears as a party that takes part in transportation processes. The party assumes party roles, such as consignee, shipper, or ordering party. Business partners can also be created manually in SAP TM by choosing Transportation Management —> Master Data —► Maintain Business Partner The Carrier Profile The carrier profile allows you to see:
Transportation lane assignment Freight code set assignment Product freight assignment Transportation group assignment
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
•
Equipment group assignment
•
Fixed transportation costs
•
Dimension costs
The carrier profile is maintained in SAP TM from the main menu: Master Data —► Transportation Network —> Define Carrier Profile Carriers are business partners to whom you have assigned the business partner role carrier. The carrier profile allows you to see the assigned lanes from the carrier's perspective. You can also remove existing assignments and add new assignments. Mass Maintenance of Lanes and Costs Carriers can be assigned to a specific geography in the transportation lane or the transportation lane can be assigned to the carrier in the carrier profile. Carrier selection can be based on TCM cost or based on internal cost. These internal costs can be maintained on the transportation lane or in the carrier profile. The mass maintenance of lanes and costs involves the assignment of carriers to transportation lanes. The cost basis for carrier selection if internal cost are used consists of the following transportation lane specific components: •
Distant dependent (per means of transport and carrier)
•
Quantity dependent (per means of transport and carrier)
The cost basis for carrier selection if internal cost are used consists of the following carrier profile specific components: •
Transportation lane costs
•
Fixed costs (per means of transport)
•
Distant dependent (per means of transport)
•
Duration dependent (per means of transport)
•
Quantity dependent (per means of transport)
The Carrier Profile
•
Transportation lane assignment
•
Fixed transportation costs
•
Dimension costs
You can store the following information in a carrier profile: Fixed transportation costs Instead of maintaining fixed transportation costs for each transportation lane if a fixed cost is to be allocated, storing the information in a carrier profile allows a central location for data maintenance.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Dimension costs Dimension costs are used to assign costs per carrier per means of transport based on a specific cost dimension such as duration, distance, or quantity. These costs could be used to determine which carriers are selected during planning to transport a load. Product and Transportation Groups Freight codes are used with freight code sets of freight forwarders and rail carriers to classify the goods that are to be transported. Freight codes are used for communication with freight forwarders and are specified in the shipping papers. Some freight codes are issued by freight forwarders and rail carriers and are used specifically for transportation by rail or road because these are means of transport-specific. The Carrier Profile
•
Freight code set assignment
•
Product freight assignment
•
Transportation group assignment
•
Equipment group assignment
You can store the following information in a carrier profile: Freight code sets These codes classify goods that are to be transported and support communication between the shipper and the freight forwarder. Transportation lane and carrier-specific parameters A carrier may be assigned to multiple transportation lanes, but the carrier profile allows a centralized view of their responsibilities. Product freight groups Product freight groups are used to determine the freight codes and freight classes for a freight code set. You use these to communicate with service providers. Transportation groups Transportation groups are used to group products together that have the same requirements for transportation. For example, you have a company that produces food. If you want to transport food that is perishable and must be kept cool during transport, you create a transportation group for products that need to be shipped together in a refrigerated vehicle. The determination of the freight codes involves the following steps: 1. From the carrier profile, determine the freight code set based on the carrier, forwarding country, and means of transport. 2. In Customizing, determine the freight code set based on the freight code set and product freight group.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Equipment Groups and Equipment Types
Equipment types form the most integral part of the entire shipping industry. These shipping containers are the structures that store the various different products that need to be shipped from one part of the world to another. Depending on the type of products being shipped or the special services needed for them, equipment types may vary in dimension, structure, materials, construction and so on. Various types of shipping containers are being used to meet the diverse requirements of the cargo shipping world. Some of the most common types of shipping containers in use today are as follows:
Dry Storage Containers Flat Rack Containers Open-top Containers Tunnel Containers Open-side Containers Double-door Containers Refrigerated Containers Insulated/Thermal Containers In SAP TM, a resource can be linked to a piece of equipment. Equipment types determine the type of truck or equipment that is requested to show up to carry out the shipping.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
Equipment Groups
Figure" 78: Equipment Groups
When your business requires that specific types of containers or equipment are needed, you may want to tie this fact into your business process. With SAP TM, you can define equipment groups and specify different types of shipping containers. For example, in the air industry, the term Universal Loading Device (ULD) is used to describe the type of container that is applicable depending upon the type of plane being used. In the ocean and road industry it would be the type of container or trailer that may be required based on the weight or dimension of the items being shipped. In SAP TM you can define equipment groups as well as equipment types. Within an equipment group you define different types of equipment that have various limitations based on weight, volume, or temperature. Equipment groups are specific to a transportation mode. Depending on the assigned transportation mode, you can enter values for ocean-specific or land-specific containers, or for air-specific unit load devices (ULDs). Equipment Type and Resource Integration
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
F reig h t Unit Building
C a rrie r Profile
Figure 79: Applying Equipment Types
Equipment types can be used when creating freight units, forwarding orders, or forwarding quotation items. You use equipment groups to group equipment types into categories. Equipment types can be used in the following contexts: •
Carrier profiles: When you define carrier profiles, you can use equipment types to describe the kind of equipment that is owned by a specific carrier.
•
Container: You can use equipment groups and types, for example, when creating forwarding orders or forwarding quotation items of the container category. Data in relation to the physical properties of the container is then available in the forwarding order and subsequent business documents as information for the planner. In addition, after you have entered the equipment group, the equipment type, and the number of containers in the forwarding order, the system calculates the tare weight and the capacity of the container in TEU based on settings applied in Customizing.
•
Freight Unit Building: When you create freight units, you can take equipment types and their physical properties into account instead of the planning-relevant quantities.
Note that you can link equipment types to a means of transport. This indirectly links it to a resource.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Exercise 13 Create Carrier Profiles
Business Example
When doing business with new carriers or when business relationships with existing carriers change, these changes need to be reflected in the transportation network. For this purpose, you need to maintain carrier profiles.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Generate and Activate an Integration Model.
1. In NWBC, create a carrier profile for CAR##-01. Check the assignment of transportation lanes to your carrier. 2. Which transportation lanes are assigned to CAR##-01?
3. Is CAR##-01 eligible for continuous moves? Maintain carrier CAR##-01 for continuous moves.
4. Create similar carrier profiles for CAR##-02, CAR##-03, and CAR##-04.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected] © Copyright. All rights reserved.
0
169
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Solution 13 Create Carrier Profiles
Business Example
When doing business with new carriers or when business relationships with existing carriers change, these changes need to be reflected in the transportation network. For this purpose, you need to maintain carrier profiles.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Generate and Activate an Integration Model.
1. In NWBC, create a carrier profile for CAR##-01. Check the assignment of transportation lanes to your carrier. a) In NWBC, choose Master Data —► General —► Define Carrier Profile. b) On the Maintain Carrier Profile screen, choose Q Create. c) Enter c a r # # - 0 1 in the Business Partner field. d) Choose ^C o n tin u e to start creating profile data. e) Save your data. 2. Which transportation lanes are assigned to CAR##-01? On the Transportation tab, you can see that the carrier is assigned to transportation lane US# # to US-## for means of transport FTL-##.________________________________________ 3. Is CAR##-01 eligible for continuous moves? Maintain carrier CAR##-01 for continuous moves. In the upper table, scroll to the right. The continuous move flag is not selected, so the carrier is not eligible for continuous moves._______________________________________________ a) Select the Continuous Moves checkbox. b) Save your data. 4. Create similar carrier profiles for CAR##-02, CAR##-03, and CAR##-04. a) Repeat Steps 1-3 for each carrier.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Examine the purpose of carrier profiles
•
Examine product and transportation groups
•
Examine equipment groups and equipment types
•
Create carrier profiles
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Lesson 7 Examining Resources in SAP TM
LESSON OVERVIEW To generate feasible shipments during transportation planning, you must consider shipping constraints. This lesson examines how you define vehicle resources that restrict how much produce can be managed in a single transport.
At the end of this lesson, you will be able to identify the calendar and handling resources that manage the loading and unloading capabilities of locations. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Apply calendar resources
•
Apply handling resources
•
Apply vehicle resources
Business Partner Operating Hours
■—
m—
■
09:00 17:00
09:00 17:00
09:00
17:00
09:00 17:00
09:00 17:00
09:00
17:00
Figure 80: Business Partner Operating Hours
Business partner operating hours need to be considered in transportation planning processes. Operating hours are represented as resources (calendar or handling) in SAP TM. Calendar resources represent operating hours without capacity constraints, whereas handling resources limit the number of parallel activities (loading and unloading) that can be scheduled in parallel. Calendar Resources For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Calendar resources determine the operating hours of locations. Loading and unloading activities can only take place during operating hours. Calendar resources are defined as resources and can be assigned to multiple locations as: •
Inbound operating hours
•
Outbound operating hours
•
Means-of-transport specific operating hours (inbound)
•
Means-of-transport specific operating hours (outbound)
Availability times can be maintained by defining capacity variants and shift sequences. Handling Resources Availability times can be maintained by defining capacity variants and shift sequences. Consumed capacity per loading and unloading operation is maintained in the location master data with the assignment of the (means of transport-specific) handling resource. The available capacity is maintained in the resource master data record. Vehicle Resources A vehicle resource represents a separate resource type and is used only in TM. Each vehicle resource defined in SAP TM represents a unit load, for example, one trailer of a certain capacity, one container of a certain capacity, or one rail car of a certain capacity. In VSR planning, a specific vehicle resource is assigned to each freight order by the optimizer. The vehicle resource commits to that freight order for the duration of the shipment process and cannot be assigned to another freight order during this period. Ensure that enough vehicle resources are created and available for VSR planning for the projected number of freight orders that might be created over a period of time. A mass creation function exists.
Vehicle Resources: Passive and Active A vehicle resource is a specific type of vehicle. There are two types of vehicle resources: passive and active. Active vehicle resources can travel by themselves. Passive vehicle resources cannot travel by themselves. A truck that has a motor and can travel by itself is an active resource. An empty trailer with no tractor is a passive resource.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Vehicle resources are designated as public or private resources. This is configured in the means of transport. If you do not set the own flag, the system will interpret the resource as public (subcontracted). Vehicle Resource Master Data Creation
The vehicle resource is a multi-dimensional resource. It can have up to 8 dimensions. For example, the capacity of a trailer can be specified as 40,000 LBS or 2200 cu. ft. or 24 pallets. However, the available capacity for this resource type cannot be maintained on a time-dependent basis. To maintain limited availability, you can do so through shift sequences. Vehicle Resource Master Data Creation
When creating a vehicle resource it is recommended that the following information is input: -
A resource name A calendar and time zone A capacity
Vehicle Resource Master Data
Transportation between locations is executed by the means of transport. The vehicle resource uses the characteristics of the means of transport, for example, truck, ship, or aircraft. Each vehicle is assigned to a single means of transport. Vehicle Resource Master Data: Required Fields The Time Zone field is required. This refers to the time zone in which the resource resides. Factory Calender is a required field and is used in planning. Continuous Dim is a required field. Continuous dim stands for the dimension of the resource. It specifies in which dimension the resource is scheduled. Capacity defines the capacity of the resource. If the multiple dimensions are maintained, the system will consider all of the dimensions in planning. During optimization, the solve will fail if either of the dimensions (weight, volume, or mass) are exceeded. Unit refers to the unit of measure of the capacity. Unit uses the alternate unit of measure that is common in SAP. Capacity, continuous dim, and unit of measure work together to determine the capacity and volume. Enterprise Asset Management Integration for Vehicle Resources You can use the following types from ERP: •
Equipment
•
Functional location
CIF was extended to allow the transfer of equipment and functional locations (there is no evaluation of equipment or functional location hierarchy). Not all TM relevant information is available in ERP, so this needs to be created via TM customizing (for example, resource type and resource class). For resources created via CIF, ERP is the leading system, that is, ERP overwrites changes done manually in TM. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
The last resource types in SAP TM are transportation unit resources. A transportation unit resource is an instance of a particular transportation unit, such as a container, that you can use to map the capacity and availability that you want to use for transportation. The equipment type and equipment group specify attributes such as the physical properties of a certain kind of transportation unit resource. Drivers are not modelled as resources in SAP TM. A driver is any person who can operate vehicles and perform transportation-related tasks as a result of certain qualifications. You can specify a driver as a party in SAP TM business documents. Parameters for Drivers
You can define the following parameters for drivers: •
Availability
•
Absences
•
Qualifications
•
Supply Chain Unit (represents the driver's home location)
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Exercise 14 Define Capacity Limits with Vehicle Resources
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support a truck-load (TL) and less-than-truckload (LTL) planning scenario. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to configure the appropriate resources needed for transportation planning.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Create a Means of Transport.
1. In NWBC, create a vehicle resource using the following data: Field
Value
Resource
FTL-##
Resource Class
Truck
Means of Transport
FTL-##
Time Zone
CST
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Factory Calendar
US
Capacity
45000
Unit
LB
2. Create a vehicle resource using the following data: Field
Value
Resource
LTL-##
Resource Class
Truck
Means of Transport
LTL-##
Time Zone
CST
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Factory Calendar
US
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Capacity
25000
Unit
LB
3. Create opening hours for customer CUST##-25. The customer should be able to receive goods from Monday to Friday, from 9.00am to 5.00pm. Create a calendar resource for this purpose and assign it to your customer master record. Field
Value
Resource
CUST##-25
Time Zone
CST
Factory Calendar
US
4. Define a shift using the data in the following table:: Field
Value
Shift
GR ##
Valid to
31.12.9999
Start Time
09:00:00
End Time
17:00:00
5. Create a shift sequence using the Shift Sequences tab and the following data: Field
Value
Shift Sequence
GR##-MF
Day Number
1
Valid To
31.12.9999
Non Work Days
Can start or finish on a non-work day
Shift 1
GR##
The shifts should repeat every seven days, but shifts should only be available on days 1 to 5. 6. Maintain a capacity variant. From the Resource screen, enter the resource and choose Capacity Variants. Assign an active variant of 01. Use the following data: Field
Value
Resource
CUST##-25
Capacity Variant
01
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
From
Beginning of current year
To
End of next year
Shift Sequence
GR##-MF
First Day
Choose First Day depending on the weekday of the date maintained in the FROM field. For example, 1= Monday, 2= Tuesday, and so on.
Workdays
Workday according to Factory Cal
7. Assign your calendar resource to the customer location. Use the following data: Field
Value
Location
CUST##-25
Inbound Operating Times
CUST##-25
Outbound Operating Times
CUST##-25
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3 Solution 14 Define Capacity Limits with Vehicle Resources
Business Example ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support a truck-load (TL) and less-than-truckload (LTL) planning scenario. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to configure the appropriate resources needed for transportation planning.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Create a Means of Transport.
1. In NWBC, create a vehicle resource using the following data: Field
Value
Resource
FTL-##
Resource Class
Truck
Means of Transport
FTL-##
Time Zone
CST
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Factory Calendar
US
Capacity
45000
Unit
LB
a) Open the Master Data folder and choose Resources —>Define Resource. b) Enter the resource and choose Q Create. c) Enter the data from the table. d) Save your data. 2. Create a vehicle resource using the following data: Field
Value
Resource
LTL-##
Resource Class
Truck
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Means of Transport
LTL-##
Time Zone
CST
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Factory Calendar
US
Capacity
25000
Unit
LB
a) Repeat Step 1 using the data from the table. 3. Create opening hours for customer CUST##-25. The customer should be able to receive goods from Monday to Friday, from 9.00am to 5.00pm. Create a calendar resource for this purpose and assign it to your customer master record. Field
Value
Resource
CUST##-25
Time Zone
CST
Factory Calendar
US
a) Open the Master Data folder and choose Resources —► Define Resource. b) Enter the resource from the table and choose Q Create. c) Choose the Calendar tab and enter the data from the table. 4. Define a shift using the data in the following table::____________________ Field
Value
Shift
GR ##
Valid to
31.12.9999
Start Time
09:00:00
End Time
17:00:00
a) Choose Definitions and select the Shifts tab. b) Enter the data from the table. 5. Create a shift sequence using the Shift Sequences tab and the following data: Field
Value
Shift Sequence
GR##-MF
Day Number
1
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Valid To
31.12.9999
Non Work Days
Can start or finish on a non-work day
Shift 1
GR##
The shifts should repeat every seven days, but shifts should only be available on days 1 to 5. a) Select the Shift Sequences tab to create daily windows and enter the data from the table. b) Create similar entries for days 2-7. Highlight your shift sequence and day. You can also choose Copy. Ensure the day is sequential to the previous entry. Remove the shift entry GR## from days 6 and 7. c) Save your shift sequence. d) Go back to the Create Resources: Header Data screen. 6. Maintain a capacity variant. From the Resource screen, enter the resource and choose Capacity Variants. Assign an active variant of 01. Use the following data: Field
Value
Resource
CUST##-25
Capacity Variant
01
From
Beginning of current year
To
End of next year
Shift Sequence
GR##-MF
First Day
Choose First Day depending on the weekday of the date maintained in the FROM field. For example, 1= Monday, 2= Tuesday, and so on.
Workdays
Workday according to Factory Cal
a) Choose Capacity Variants —>Interval to create new capacity variants. b) Enter the data from the table. c) Choose Continue to accept the data. d) Save the capacity variant. e) Go back to the Resource Maintenance screen. f) In the General Data tab, in the Available Capacity screen area, enter the active variant 01. g) Save your data. 7. Assign your calendar resource to the customer location. Use the following data:
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Location
CUST##-25
Inbound Operating Times
CUST##-25
Outbound Operating Times
CUST##-25
a) Open the Master Data folder and choose Transportation Network —> Locations —> Define Location b) Enter the location. c) Choose Change to modify the location data. d) Choose the Resources tab to assign a calendar. e) Select the Operating Times radio button f) Enter the Inbound Operating Times and Outbound Operating Times. g) Save your data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Apply calendar resources
•
Apply handling resources
•
Apply vehicle resources
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 3
Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following are aspects of integration that the CIF supports? Choose the correct answers.
□ □ □ □
A The initial integration of an object. B The initial creation in TM. C The activation of the existing integration models. D The transfer of changes to data records.
2. Assigning partner functions in the SAP system determines the functions of particular partners in the sales process. Each partner can have only one function. Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ □
True False
3. When you create transportation zones, it reduces the amount of master data in the system by grouping locations together. Which of the following are examples of transportation zones? Choose the correct answers. I A Regional Zones B Postal Code Zones | C Country Zones D City Zones E Island Zones
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
4. You cannot assign a transportation zone to itself or to a zone already assigned to the same zone. Determine whether this statement is true or false. | True False 5. When defining the means of transport, you may want to limit how many resources are available when planning. When you select the Multi-Resource checkbox, you can define how many of these types of transport are available. Determine whether this statement is true or false. | True False 6. The transportation lane stores distance and duration information for each means of transport assignment. Determine whether this statement is true or false. | True False 7. When can loading and unloading activities take place? Choose the correct answer. | A Loading and unloading activities can take place outside operating hour when planned in advance. B Loading and unloading activities can only take place during operating hours. C Loading and unloading activities can take place only before 08.00 hours. D Loading and unloading activities can take place regardless of the operating hours defined by calendar resources.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
8. Which of the following vehicle resource attributes are considered for planning? Choose the correct answers.
□ □ □ □
C Time zone
□
A Capacity
E Fuel type
B Means of transport
D Fuel economy
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which of the following are aspects of integration that the CIF supports? Choose the correct answers.
|~xj A The initial integration of an object. |~xj
B The initial creation in TM.
|~xj C |~xj
The activation of the existing integration models.
D The transfer of changes to data records.
Correct. The CIF supports all these aspects of integration: the initial integration of an object, for example, a specific customer master, and the initial creation in TM. Over time the master data may be updated in SAP ERP to keep ERP and TM in sync. Integration models are regenerated and activated periodically. 2. Assigning partner functions in the SAP system determines the functions of particular partners in the sales process. Each partner can have only one function. Determine whether this statement is true or false. | True \x \ False Correct. One partner may have several functions.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
3. When you create transportation zones, it reduces the amount of master data in the system by grouping locations together. Which of the following are examples of transportation zones? Choose the correct answers. [x ] A Regional Zones [x~| B Postal Code Zones
[~xj
C Country Zones D City Zones E Island Zones
Correct. Regional, postal code, and country zones are all types of transportation zones used inTM. 4. You cannot assign a transportation zone to itself or to a zone already assigned to the same zone. Determine whether this statement is true or false. [x ] True False Correct. No recursive assignments are allowed. 5. When defining the means of transport, you may want to limit how many resources are available when planning. When you select the Multi-Resource checkbox, you can define how many of these types of transport are available. Determine whether this statement is true or false. [x ] True False Correct. In Customizing for TM, by selecting the Multi-Resource checkbox you define how many types of transport are available in planning.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
6. The transportation lane stores distance and duration information for each means of transport assignment. Determine whether this statement is true or false. 0
True False
Correct. In SAP TM, the transportation lane master data object links two locations. The transportation lane does store distance and duration information for each means of transport assignment. 7. When can loading and unloading activities take place? Choose the correct answer. | A Loading and unloading activities can take place outside operating hour when planned in advance.
|~xj
B Loading and unloading activities can only take place during operating hours. C Loading and unloading activities can take place only before 08.00 hours. D Loading and unloading activities can take place regardless of the operating hours defined by calendar resources.
Correct. Calendar resources define the operating hours of locations, and as a result, loading and unloading activities can only take place during operating hours. 8. Which of the following vehicle resource attributes are considered for planning? Choose the correct answers.
|~xj
A Capacity
|~xj
B Means of transport
\x \ C Ti me zone D Fuel economy E Fuel type Correct. Capacity, location, means of transport, time zone, and continuous dimension are attributes that are considered for planning.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
UNIT 4
Conditions and Incom patibilities
Lesson 1 Defining Conditions in SAP TM
192
Lesson 2 Identifying Incompatibilities Exercise 15: Create Incompatibility for Transportation Groups
195 199
UNIT OBJECTIVES
•
Examine conditions
•
Identify the purpose of incompatibilities
•
Create incompatibility definitions
•
Create incompatibility settings
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 4 Lesson 1 Defining Conditions in SAP TM
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, we examine how conditions are used in SAP TM. Conditions are used throughout SAP TM to adapt the software to user processes. Different condition types are used in different areas, from ERP Logistics Integration, planning, execution to charge calculation and settlement.
Conditions can have different origins. They can be as simple as direct business object access conditions that simply read a value from a predefined field, or as complex as business rules framework plus (BRF+) decision tables or expressions. At the end of this lesson, you will be able to identify condition types used in SAP TM and know how to create conditions. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Examine conditions
Condition Usage Conditions are tests performed against various objects, such as transportation requirements or freight units, to determine whether a situation is true or false. For example, to decide if products on a single transportation requirement can be shipped together, each item on the OTR is checked for certain parameters. If a certain parameter is found, rules are built to determine where consolidation can take place. If an incompatibility exists, more than one shipment is necessary. Condition Types
Over fifty predefined condition types are used in the following: Incompatibilities Document type determination Organizational unit determination Printing Approvals Change controller: tolerances Loading and unloading durations Transportation charge management Customer-specific rules
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Dependent Values
Use conditions to determine dependent values in the following areas: •
Filtering freight units
•
Determining freight unit building rules (FUB rules)
•
Incompatibilities
•
Determining the sales organization
•
Determining transportation charge rate tables and agreements with a charge calculation rule
•
Change controller
Condition Definition This concept examines the origin of the condition, and input and output values. Origin of Condition
•
Direct Business Object Access
•
BRF+Decision Table
•
BRF+ Expression
•
Input Value There are various input values and they are determined by the following factors:
•
-
Direct Business Object Access
-
Data Crawler
-
Determination Class
Output Values -
Depending on Condition Type (field or structure)
Input and Output Values Define input values for each condition by defining business object fields including user-specific fields, or values determined in external determination classes. The available input values depend on the condition type chosen. The condition type defines the area in which the system is to take the condition into account. SAP delivers a number of condition types in the standard system. The output values are determined by the condition type. For example, the FUB rule is a result of FUB rule determination. The system generates a Business Rule Framework plus (BRFplus) decision table from input and output values. The system processes this table from top to bottom during determination. When the system finds a row in the BRFplus decision table whose input values match the current input values, it copies the corresponding output values and processes them in the area that made the call. SAP delivers the following in the standard system:
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
•
Condition types
•
Customer condition types
•
Data access definitions
•
Assignment of data access definitions to condition types (including specification of which data access definitions are used by default for a condition type)
Condition Type Definition
If you need additional fields for the condition types to be delivered as standard, or if you want to use customer condition types, create new data access definitions and extend the assignments in Customizing. You can also change or add to the data access definitions used by default. The condition type must be identified when defining a condition in SAP TM. A condition type is a configurable object that is based on field contents stored in various business object nodes. Each condition type is assigned to a business object (structure) and the node name (at the header or item level). When defining a condition type, you can identify when a result is found, if it is stored in a structure, and if one or more conditions may exist for this condition type. Condition types are then assigned to data access definitions. These objects specify what fields and in what sequence users can define specific condition records. Conditions are used throughout SAP TM in planning and execution. Specify the condition type, the fields against which you are testing, and how you want to store the test results when creating a condition. This is referred to as the origin of the condition. The Origin of the Condition
In SAP TM, there are three different origins: •
Direct Business Object Access
•
Condition Based on BRFplus Decision Table
•
Condition Based on BRFplus Expression
The Direct Business Object Access condition returns directly the value determined by the data access definition. There is no evaluation of the data. The BRFplus Decision Table condition takes the input of the data access definition and evaluates it in a table. This condition table can be maintained from the condition user interface. The BRFplus Expression can be maintained in the form of nested if/then statements. LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Examine conditions
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 4 Lesson 2 Identifying Incompatibilities
LESSON OVERVIEW As part of the planning process, a company defines various rules and guidelines regarding the items that can and cannot be shipped together. These scenarios are referred to as compatibilities or incompatibilities.
In this lesson, you will examine how conditions are created to support incompatibility rules that are used in planning. At the end of this lesson, you will be able to create an incompatibility for transportation groups. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Identify the purpose of incompatibilities
•
Create incompatibility definitions
•
Create incompatibility settings
Incompatibilities During transportation planning, companies prepare a set of guidelines regarding shipping. For example, if a shipper has products that need to be transported via a refrigerated container, they cannot ship those products with frozen freight units. While planning transportation shipments, companies define rules regarding how they consolidate loads into a single freight order. There are many factors other than capacity that impact how freight orders are built. In SAP TM, these rules are called incompatibilities. This data defines the relevant parameters controlling when it is and is not appropriate to consolidate loads.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Consolidation
C h ille d
F ro z e n
Figure 82: Conditions and Incompatibilities
In the figure, a company has a variety of products to ship. The temperature at which items must be stored during transit is the attribute that signals if items can be consolidated. A test is executed to decide the temperature in which each product is shipped. A rule states that items classified as chilled cannot be shipped with items classified as frozen. This could lead to damage or spoilage if a product is shipped at the wrong temperature. Incompatibilities and Conditions Incompatibilities are used in combination with conditions to influence the results in SAP TM during freight unit building, transportation planning, transportation proposals, and carrier selection. Incompatibilities are important when defining requirements for load building. For example, freight units with different incoterms must not be transported together. Refrigerated goods need to be transported in appropriate means of transport. Certain means of transport cannot be loaded at a specific location because the location does not have a suitable loading ramp. Incompatibility Application Incompatibilities are defined in SAP TM. Choose Application Administration —> Planning —► General Settings —> Incompatibility Definitions —> Create Incompatibility. Incompatibilities can be defined between two attributes of two business objects. This requires that two conditions are defined and relevant results are specified.Two business objects are then incompatible if the result of the conditions matches the relevant results. Setting the Identical Values Only checkbox in the incompatibility definition allows for an incompatibility to be defined between two instances of the same business object, for example, two freight units. In this case, a single condition is defined in the incompatibility definition. The two business object instances are then only incompatible if their values differ.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Incompatibility Definitions
When creating an incompatibility definition, one must specify a validity area. Validity areas are comprised of an incompatibility area and an incompatibility type. Incompatibility areas define where an incompatibility can be used. Four incompatibility areas exist in TM: •
Vehicle scheduling and routing planning
•
Freight unit building
•
Carrier selection
•
Delivery proposals
Incompatibility Types
Incompatibility types are delivered by SAP and define the objects that are the focus of the rule being enforced. The following list contains examples of incompatibility types: •
Freight unit - Freight unit
•
Freight unit - Vehicle
•
Freight unit - Transshipment location
•
Carrier - Transportation Order
In addition to the validity area, the incompatibility definition can determine how the rule is enforced in both manual and automatic planning by defining the reaction to a positive test. A user defines two conditions and their respective values at the core of the incompatibility.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Incompatibility Settings
Transportation planning profiles specify when the system allows incompatibilities to be violated during manual planning, in VSR optimization, or in background processing. Incompatibility settings are assigned within these profiles. The incompatibility settings group together several incompatibility definitions that may apply to a planning run. Only incompatibilities for the same incompatibility area can be combined. Incompatibility settings can be maintained in planning profiles, carrier selection settings, delivery profiles, and the freight unit building rule.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 4 Exercise 15 Create Incompatibility for Transportation Groups
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create an incompatibility for transportation groups required for transportation planning. 1. In NWBC, create a condition based on the transportation group of the freight unit using the BRFplus Decision Table. Use the following data: Field
Value
Condition
INC_FU_TGRP-# #
Description
Transportation Group for ##
Condition Type
/SCMTMS/INC_FU
Origin of Condition
Condition Based on BRFplus Decision Table
Data Access Definition for Condition screen area
/SCMTMS/T0R_TRAN_GR
2. On the New Condition Definition screen, insert four new rows. Edit the rows in theTable Contents screen area using the dropdown menus. Use the direct value input to enter the following data: Column
Field
Transportation Group
0003 Container
Eval. Result
YES
Column
Field
Transportation Group
0002 In Liquid Form
Ev Result
YES
Column
Field
Transportation Group
0001 On pallets
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Column
Field
Ev Result
YES
Column
Field
Transportation Group
*
Ev Result
NO
3. Create another condition selection based on the means of transport for the vehicle resource using a BRFplus Decision Table. Use the following data:______________________________ Field
Value
Condition
INC_VRES_MOT_TC##
Description
Vehicles ##
Condition Type
/SCMTMS/INC_VEHICLE
Origin of Condition
Condition Based on BRFplus Decision Table
Data Access Definition for Condition screen area
/SCMTMS/VEH_RE S_MTR
4. On the New Condition Definition screen, insert two new rows. Edit the rows in the Table Contents screen area using the dropdown menus. Use the following data: Field
Value
Vehicle Resource Means Group
FTL-##
Ev Result
YES
Field
Value
Vehicle Resource Means Group
LTL-##
Ev Result
NO
5. Create an incompatibility between the transportation group and the MOT. Use the following data: Field
Value
Incompatibility
INC##_TGRP_0001
Description
FU MOT Incompatibility for Group
## Incompatibility area
01
Incompatibility type
04
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
First condition
INC_FU_TGRP-##
Relevant condition result
YES
Second condition
INC_VRES_MOT_TC##
Relevant condition result
NO
6. Create incompatibility settings for an incompatibility area with the new incompatibility. Do not change the Violation in Manual or Automatic planning. Use the following data:_____________ Field
Value
Incompatibility settings
GEN_INC_# #
Description
GR## INC Settings
Incompatibility area
Complete to VSR (VSR Opt. and Man. Ping and T)
Incompatibility Selection screen area, Incom patibility column
INC##_TRGP_0001
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 4 Solution 15 Create Incompatibility for Transportation Groups
Business Example ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create an incompatibility for transportation groups required for transportation planning. 1. In NWBC, create a condition based on the transportation group of the freight unit using the BRFplus Decision Table. Use the following data: Field
Value
Condition
INC_FU_TGRP-# #
Description
Transportation Group for ##
Condition Type
/SCMTMS/INC_FU
Origin of Condition
Condition Based on BRFplus Decision Table
Data Access Definition for Condition screen area
/SCMTMS/T0R_TRAN_GR
a) Choose Application Administration —>General Settings —> Conditions —> Create Condition. b) Enter the data from the table and continue. c) Choose Data Access Definition, d) Choose Create. e) Enter the Data Access Definition for Condition using the input help. f) Go back to the New Condition Definition screen. 2. On the New Condition Definition screen, insert four new rows. Edit the rows in theTable Contents screen area using the dropdown menus. Use the direct value input to enter the following data: Column
Field
Transportation Group
0003 Container
Eval. Result
YES
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Column
Field
Transportation Group
0002 In Liquid Form
Ev Result
YES
Column
Field
Transportation Group
0001 On pallets
Ev Result
YES
Column
Field
Transportation Group
*
Ev Result
NO
a) Choose [■ ^ Insert New Row b) Enter the data from the first table c) Repeat steps a-b to create four rows with the data from the tables. d) Save your data. 3. Create another condition selection based on the means of transport for the vehicle resource using a BRFplus Decision Table. Use the following data: Field
Value
Condition
INC_VRES_MOT_TC##
Description
Vehicles ##
Condition Type
/SCMTMS/INC_VEHICLE
Origin of Condition
Condition Based on BRFplus Decision Table
Data Access Definition for Condition screen area
/SCMTMS/VEH_RES_MTR
a) Choose Application Administration —>General Settings —*■ Conditions —*■ Create Condition. b) Enter the data from the table and continue. c) Choose Data Access Definition. d) Choose Create. e) Enter the Data Access Definition for Condition, using the input help. f) Go back to the Create Definition Condition screen.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
4. On the New Condition Definition screen, insert two new rows. Edit the rows in the Table Contents screen area using the dropdown menus. Use the following data: Field
Value
Vehicle Resource Means Group
FTL-##
Ev Result
YES
Field
Value
Vehicle Resource Means Group
LTL-##
Ev Result
NO
a) Choose [^ /n s e rf New Row b) Enter the data from the first table. c) Repeat steps a-b to create another row with the data from the second table. d) Save your data. 5. Create an incompatibility between the transportation group and the MOT. Use the following data: Field
Value
Incompatibility
INC # #_TGRP_0001
Description
FU MOT Incompatibility for Group ##
Incompatibility area
01
Incompatibility type
04
First condition
INC_FU_TGRP-# #
Relevant condition result
YES
Second condition
INC_VRE S_MOT_TC # #
Relevant condition result
NO
a) Choose Application Administration —*■Planning —> General Settings —*■ Incompatibility Definitions —> Create Incompatibility. b) Enter the data from the table. c) Save your data. 6. Create incompatibility settings for an incompatibility area with the new incompatibility. Do not change the Violation in Manual or Automatic planning. Use the following data:
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Incompatibility settings
GEN_INC_# #
Description
GR## INC Settings
Incompatibility area
Complete to VSR (VSR Opt. and Man. Ping and T)
Incompatibility Selection screen area, Incom patibility column
INC##_TRGP_0001
a) Choose Application Administration —> Planning —> General Settings —> Incompatibility Settings —► Create Incompatibility Settings. b) Enter the data from the table and choose Insert. c) Save your data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Identify the purpose of incompatibilities
•
Create incompatibility definitions
•
Create incompatibility settings
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 4
Learning Assessment
1. How are input values for a condition determined? Choose the correct answers. | A Using direct business object access B Using the data crawler | C Using a determination class D Using a process controller strategy 2. Where can incompatibilities be used in SAP Transportation Management? Choose the correct answers. | A Freight unit building B Delivery proposal creation C Organizational unit determination D Selection profiles 3. Only incompatibilities for the same incompatibility area can be combined. Determine whether this statement is true or false. | True False
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. How are input values for a condition determined? Choose the correct answers.
|~xj
A Using direct business object access
|~xj
B Using the data crawler
|~xj
C Using a determination class D Using a process controller strategy
That is correct. Input values for a condition are determined by data access definitions based on either direct business object access, the data crawler, or a determination class. 2. Where can incompatibilities be used in SAP Transportation Management? Choose the correct answers.
|~xj
A Freight unit building
|~xj
B Delivery proposal creation C Organizational unit determination D Selection profiles
That is correct. Incompatibilities can be used during freight unit building and delivery proposal creation. 3. Only incompatibilities for the same incompatibility area can be combined. Determine whether this statement is true or false. 0
True False
Correct. Only incompatibilities for the same incompatibility area can be combined.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
UNIT 5
Transportation Planning Preparation
Lesson 1
Examining Optimizer Planning
211
Exercise 16: Create Freight Order Types
215
Lesson 2
Defining Selection Profiles
223
Exercise 17: Create Selection Profiles and Sub Profiles
229
Lesson 3
Creating Planning Profiles
236
Exercise 18: Create a Planning Profile
241
Lesson 4
Creating Capacity Selection Settings Exercise 19: Create a Capacity Selection Profile
248 249
UNIT OBJECTIVES
•
Analyze the transportation planning process in SAP TM
•
Examine optimizer planning
•
Define selection profiles
•
Create a geographical selection profile
•
Create time selection profiles
•
Create additional selection profiles
•
Examine planning profiles
•
Examine planning strategies
•
Create a strategy
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
•
Create capacity selection settings
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 5 Lesson 1 Examining Optimizer Planning
LESSON OVERVIEW Your transportation network is now built and integration is configured. In this lesson, you will examine how planning is done in SAP with the optimizer. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Analyze the transportation planning process in SAP TM
•
Examine optimizer planning
The Transportation Planning Process SAP ERP
i
S a le s O rd er / P u rch a se O rd er
J.
r
Delivery
Forwarding Q uotation
— ----1---------------1
O rd e r-b a s e d
Delivery-based
Forwarding
Transportation
Transportation R eq u irem en t
O rd er
R e q u irem en t
Capacities Execution / Subcontr.
Transportation Network Agreement
Charges / Settlement
Calculation Sheet
Freight Settlement Document
Rate Table
Forwarding Settlement Document
Accounting Document SAP ERP
Figure 85: SAP TM Document Flow
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
The figure shows that the transportation planning process has several stages. You already designed your transportation network and integrated your ERP system. As a result of integration, order-based transportation requirements are created and freight units are generated. The next stage is to create the freight order that represents a single shipment or load departing from one of your facilities. The freight order can be created manually or using the vehicle scheduling and routing optimizer. Freight Order Creation
The figure demonstrates the process of building freight orders via a planning process. Freight units are the input to the planning process and freight orders are its output. Several freight units can be consolidated in one freight order if the VSR optimizer evaluates it is cheaper to do so. Building Freight Orders Manually
Use the Freight Order Management component in SAP TM to create and edit freight orders and freight bookings. Freight orders are used for land transportation and freight bookings are used for sea and air transportation. The freight order's execution is planned by a carrier or the shipper. The freight order contains the following: •
Plan for the logistical processing: when and onto which vehicle freight units are to be loaded
•
Planned departure times for the vehicle
•
Execution data
You use freight orders for land transportation. You define the most important settings for the freight order in the freight order type. Freight Order Structure
Freight orders contain the following information: •
Planning information
•
Business partner
•
Locations and dates and times
•
The document flow
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
•
Transportation charges and cost distribution
•
Logistical dependencies
•
Cargo
•
Execution information, for example, actual departure times
•
Output management, for example, print documents
•
Customs-relevant information
•
Information about transportation stages, for example, durations and distances
•
Status information
•
Subcontracting information, for example, carriers and their prices as well as tendering information
Use the business documents in freight order management to enter all the information required for transportation planning and execution, such as source and destination locations, dates and times, product information, and resources. Freight Order Types
The freight order type determines how a freight order is processed in SAP TM and allows for various parameters to support this process: •
Define number range intervals
•
Define subcontracting relevance
•
Define how consignee and shipper are determined
•
Define if the freight order is to be fixed during saving
•
Define if the freight order can be deleted or only canceled
•
Define sequence type of stops
If freight orders are created during planning and have associated settings in the planning profile, the system determines the freight order type according to the Customizing settings.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 5 Exercise 16 Create Freight Order Types
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to configure the transportation order (TOR) type needed for planning in SAP TM. 1. In Customizing for SAP TM, view the number range used in transportation order type (TO) definition. 2. In Customizing for SAP TM, create freight order (TOR) type TM ##. The freight order can be deleted, propagate execution info, use BW relevance, enable settlement, enable charge calculation, and track changes. Use the following data: Field
Value
Freight Order Type
TM##
Description
GR## Freight Order
Freight Order Can Be Subcontracted
Relevant for Subcontracting
Shipper/Consignee Determination
Determination Based on Predecessor Docu ments
Sequence Type of Stops
Defined and Linear
Time For Drawing
Draw Number When Saving Document
Number Range Interval
05
Weight
US Pound
Volume
Cubic Yard
Default FSD Type
Default Freight Settlement Document
Default Change Strategy
DEF_CHACO
Execution Track. Relev
Execution Tracking with External Event Man ager
Application Object Type
ODT30_TO
Transportation Mode
01- Road
Output Profile
/SCMTMS/TOR
Add. Output Profile
/SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD
Document Creation Relevance
Shipment Creation in SAP ERP
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Purchasing Org
50000808
Purchasing Group
50000810
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 5 Solution 16 Create Freight Order Types
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to configure the transportation order (TOR) type needed for planning in SAP TM. 1. In Customizing for SAP TM, view the number range used in transportation order type (TO) definition. a) Choose SAP Transportation Management —► Transportation Management —> Freight Order Management —► Define Number Range Intervals for Freight Order Management b) Choose
Execute
c) To show the number range groups used, choose <^> Intervals. d) Note the available objects for assignment later to TOR type. e) Choose © Exit 2. In Customizing for SAP TM, create freight order (TOR) type TM ##. The freight order can be deleted, propagate execution info, use BW relevance, enable settlement, enable charge calculation, and track changes. Use the following data: Field
Value
Freight Order Type
TM##
Description
GR## Freight Order
Freight Order Can Be Subcontracted
Relevant for Subcontracting
Shipper/Consignee Determination
Determination Based on Predecessor Docu ments
Sequence Type of Stops
Defined and Linear
Time For Drawing
Draw Number When Saving Document
Number Range Interval
05
Weight
US Pound
Volume
Cubic Yard
Default FSD Type
Default Freight Settlement Document
Default Change Strategy
DEF_CHACO
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Execution Track. Relev
Execution Tracking with External Event Man ager
Application Object Type
ODT30_TO
Transportation Mode
01- Road
Output Profile
/SCMTMS/TOR
Add. Output Profile
/SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD
Document Creation Relevance
Shipment Creation in SAP ERP
Purchasing Org
50000808
Purchasing Group
50000810
a) Choose SAP Transportation Management —*■ Transportation Management —> Freight Order Management —*■ Freight Order —> Define Freight Order Types b) Choose
Execute
c) Choose New Entries d) Enter the data from the table. e) Select the required checkboxes. f) Save your data and exit the screen.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Optimizer Planning
The problem of the Traveling Sales Person: Detecting the shortest way that connects a number of locations.
The traveling sales person problem belongs to a group of computational problems that cannot be solved optimally in a reasonable time (NP-complete problems). The vehicle scheduling problem in TM is a generalization of the traveling sales person problem. An algorithm uses search strategies to find the best solution for a given runtime. Optimizer Planning Objectives Goal: Determine a transportation plan that minimizes total costs and satisfies all constraints. o
Decisions: o
per freight unit: transport or not?
o
per transported freight unit: select path through transportation network (stages)
o
per selected stage: select capacity / vehicle resource
o
per capacity/vehicle resource: o Select relative ordering of activities (= routing) o
o
Assign start time to each activity (= scheduling)
Total costs = sum of: o
Penalty costs (non-delivery, earliness, lateness), and
o
Capacity / vehicle costs (fixed, duration, stops, quantity, distance)
Figure 88: VSR Goals and Objectives
The goal of VSR optimization is to deliver freight units using vehicle resources while adhering to all constraints and minimizing cost. The VSR optimizer reaches its goal by consolidating orders into vehicles and so reducing the overall distance travelled. The VSR optimizer has the following capabilities:
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
•
Create multi-drop shipments
•
Create multi-pick shipments
•
Use transshipment locations
•
Use the most cost-effective mode and means of transport
•
Use combinations of mode and means of transport
•
Optimize resource utilization
•
Minimize distance
•
Minimize duration
Optimizer Planning Constraints Real-world constraints can be modeled in TM and considered during VSR optimization: •
A handling resource for loading or unloading that can have breaks
•
The transshipment time of an order at a special location can be restricted by a minimum and maximum duration
•
Some incompatibilities between orders, vehicles, transshipment locations, and combinations, may exist
•
You can restrict driving times of vehicles with the scheduling constraints. For example, you can specify that after eight hours of travel, a two hour break is required.
•
Non-delivery/execution penalty
•
Earliness and lateness penalty
•
Fixed cost (per vehicle)
•
Travel-dependent costs such as distance and duration (per vehicle)
•
Load-dependent costs (per vehicle)
•
Sustainability cost like C02 emission (only with BAdl)
Optimizer Performance The VSR optimizer solves the VSR problem using evolutionary local search. This is a populationbased meta-heuristic that borrows selection principles from evolutionary algorithms and relies on local optimization.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Costs
<
Phase 2: Non-Improvement Moves
First Solution
/" v
t Solution Runtime Figure 89: VSR Optimizer: Calculation Process
The optimizer tries to solve the problem of the assignment of freight units to vehicles and the determination of a delivery order for each vehicle so that total transportation costs are minimized. It considers several constraints and penalty costs as part of the total transportation cost. When the optimizer starts, the engine calls back to the application for the complete description of the scenario. In this period, the optimizer engine is running and searches for a solution to the optimization problem.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Analyze the transportation planning process in SAP TM
•
Examine optimizer planning
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 5 Lesson 2 Defining Selection Profiles
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, we examine the features that are available for including or restricting transportation requirements and freight units during interactive or background planning. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Define selection profiles
•
Create a geographical selection profile
•
Create time selection profiles
•
Create additional selection profiles
Selection Profiles Selection profiles are used for various purposes in SAP TM. They can be used to select freight units, freight orders, freight bookings and transportation units.
The selection profile is a user-specific grouping of business documents that is considered during transportation planning. The system takes into account the selection profile you create during interactive planning, VSR optimization, and carrier selection. Selection Attributes For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
In the selection profile and in the assigned selection attributes, you define which business documents the system is to take into account, as well as the maximum number of documents. You can assign the following selection attributes to a selection profile: •
Time-related selection attributes in which you define the demand horizon
•
Geographical selection attributes in which you define source and destination locations
•
Additional selection attributes in which you define additional attributes for database queries
Geographical Selection Profiles The geographical profile distinguishes which source and destination locations are relevant for freight unit selection. Geographical Selection Profile
Source Locations
Source Zones
Destination Locations
Destination Zones
Figure 91: Geographical Selection Profiles
The geographical profile is split into four sections: •
Source Locations
•
Source Transportation Zones
•
Destination Locations
•
Destination Transportation Zones
Within each section, you define an inclusive or exclusive set of location values that determine which freight units are relevant for planning. Each section allows users to define specific values or ranges of values, using the logical greater than, less than, or not equal to, to provide precise selection for planning. Geographical Restrictions Within each section, you define an inclusive or exclusive set of location values that determine which freight units are relevant for planning. Each section allows users to define specific values or ranges of values, using the logical of greater than, less than, or not equal to, to provide precise selection for planning. Time Selection Profiles Freight units are selected based on the dates and times they were originally scheduled to be picked up (loading start) and delivered. Freight Unit Selection Freight unit selection can depend on pick-up windows, delivery windows or both. In the timerelated selection attributes, you define how pick-up and delivery time windows are combined. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Combination with AND A freight unit item is selected if at least one time element of the pick-up time window (for example, the start of the requested pick-up date) falls into the pick-up time window and at least one time element of the delivery time window (for example, the end of the acceptable delivery date) falls into the delivery time window. Combination with OR A freight unit item is selected if at least one time element of the pick-up time window (for example, the start of the requested pick-up date) falls into the pick-up time window or at least one time element of the delivery time window (for example, the end of the acceptable delivery date) falls into the delivery time window. Comb. Pick-Up Wind, with See Loc., Del. Wind, with Dst. Loc The Comb. Pick-Up Wind, with See Loc., Del. Wind, with Dst. Loc setting leads to a combination of the query settings for the time window and the geographical selection. A freight unit item is selected if the pick-up window lies within the planning horizon at one of the selected loading locations or if the delivery window lies within the planning horizon at one of the selected locations. Planning Horizon Restrictions When executing VSR optimization, the original dates can be used as a selection restriction. In addition to the dates defined in the freight units, conditions defined at OTR creation can influence windows of time that are related to pick-ups and delivery. Today
—
/\
D eliv e ry horizon
= Freig h t U nit
■
= M aterial A vailab ility D ate
►
= R eq u e s te d D eliv e ry Date
Figure 92: Planning Horizon
You define the demand horizon in the time-related selection attributes that you assign to your selection profile. You can define a demand horizon for pickup and a demand horizon for delivery. The system chooses all freight units and freight orders whose pickup date and time or delivery date and time lies within the relevant demand horizon.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Demand Horizon: Absolute or Relative
You can define the demand horizon as absolute or relative. With absolute time periods, you define the demand horizon precisely by defining a start and end date and a start and end time (calendar date). If using relative times, you do not define the demand horizon with precise dates and times, but specify instead a duration starting from the current date. The system automatically determines the start and end date and the start and end time. If the demand horizon is not to start on the current date, you can define an offset. The relative demand horizon is then defined as follows: •
Start of demand horizon = current date + defined offset. The offset is made up of the offset in days and the additional offset in hours and minutes.
•
End of demand horizon = start of demand horizon + defined duration of demand horizon. The duration of the demand horizon is made up of the duration in days and the additional duration in hours and minutes.
If you specify a factory calendar, the system considers non-working days when calculating the start of the horizon. In this situation, the planning horizon always begins on a working day. Combination with And D elivery horizon
r 1 Days
'---- y---- V O ffset
—
7 Days
5 Days
V P icku p horizon
= Freig h t U nit
R .................. ►
□
= M aterial A vailab ility D ate
►
= R eq u e s te d D elivery D ate
= Freig h t U nits not in o rd er S electio n
Figure 93: Combination of Pick-Up and Delivery Windows (1)
When you define both a pick-up horizon and a delivery horizon, you specify how they can be used in combination: inclusion or exclusion. When the Combination with And method is chosen, a freight unit item is selected based on two conditions: 1. If at least one time element of the pick-up window, such as the start of the requested pick-up date, falls into the pick-up window.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
2. If at least one time element of the delivery window, such as the end of the acceptable delivery date, falls into the delivery time window. Combination with Or D elivery horizon
r
/\
■
= M aterial A vailab ility D ate
*■
= R eq u e s te d D e liv e ry D ate
Figure 94: Combination of Pick-Up and Delivery Windows (2)
When the Combination with Or method is chosen, a freight unit item is selected based on one of the following two conditions: 1. If at least one time element of the pick-up window, such as the start of the requested pick-up date, falls into the pick-up window. 2. If at least one time element of the delivery window, such as the end of the acceptable delivery date, falls into the delivery time window. Additional Selection Attributes You can restrict the selection by choosing Additional Criteria —► Additional Selection Attributes. Additional Selection Attribute Options
•
•
Option 1: Definition of Additional Attributes for Database Queries -
+ fast
-
- limited to the attributes of a business object
Option 2: Filtering on the Basis of Conditions -
+ flexible
-
- slower
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 5 Exercise 17 Create Selection Profiles and Sub Profiles
Business Example
Your business plans large volumes of transportation requirements. To reduce overlap between planners and restrict certain types of business requirements, create several selection profiles to filter requirements and master data for your planning runs. Create the necessary selection profiles and selection profile attributes to support planning in TM (from the transportation cockpit or in the background).
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of all exercises in unit three of this course.
1. In NWBC, create a geographical selection attribute for your group. Select both locations. Use the following data: Field
Value
Geographical Sel. Attributes
GEO-##
Description
Geographical Attributes for Group
## Source Locations tab: Sign
Inclusive
Source Locations tab .Option
=
Source Locations tab .Lower Value
SP3100
Destination Locations tab: Sign
Inclusive
Destination Locations tab: Option
Within Range
Destination Locations tab: Lower Value
CUST##-11
Destination Locations tab: Upper Value
CUST##-30
2. Create a time-related selection attribute. Select the Round Horizon to Full Days checkbox. Use the following data: Field
Value
Time-Rel. Sel. Attributes
TIME-##
Description
Selection Horizon for Group ##
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Absolute/Relative Horizon
Use Relative Horizon
Factory Cal. for Offs/Dur. Calc
US
Use Index Time for Selection
Use Index Time of Stop
Comb, of Pick-Up and Delivery Windows
Combination with OR
Pick-Up Days
180
Offset Direction
Future
Offset in Days
0
Delivery in Days
200
Offset Direction
Future
Offset in Days
0
3. Create an additional selection attribute. Use the profile to restrict those freight units whose status is not planned, partially planned, and planned. Field
Value
Additional Sel. Attributes
ASEL-##
Description
Freight Units ##
Planned Requirements
Include in Selection
Documents Blocked for Planning
Exclude in Selection
Selection Values tab '.Business Object
/SCMTMS/TO
Selection Values tab: Field Name
PLAN_STATUS_ROOT
Selection Values tab: Sign
Inclusive
Selection Values tab '.Option
Within Range
Selection Values tab:Lower Limit
01
Selection Values tab'.Upper Limit
03
4. Create a selection profile for your group. Use the following data: Field
Value
Selection Profile
SEL-##
Description
Selection Profile for ##
Maximum number of selected objects
200
Time-Related Sel. Attributes
TIME-##
Geographical Sel. Attributes
GEO-##
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Additional Sel. Attributes
ASEL-##
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 5 Solution 17 Create Selection Profiles and Sub Profiles
Business Example
Your business plans large volumes of transportation requirements. To reduce overlap between planners and restrict certain types of business requirements, create several selection profiles to filter requirements and master data for your planning runs. Create the necessary selection profiles and selection profile attributes to support planning in TM (from the transportation cockpit or in the background).
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of all exercises in unit three of this course.
1. In NWBC, create a geographical selection attribute for your group. Select both locations. Use the following data: Field
Value
Geographical Set. Attributes
GEO-##
Description
Geographical Attributes for Group
## Source Locations tab: Sign
Inclusive
Source Locations tab .Option
=
Source Locations tab:Lower Value
SP3100
Destination Locations tab: Sign
Inclusive
Destination Locations tab: Option
Within Range
Destination Locations tab: Lower Value
CUST##-11
Destination Locations tab: Upper Value
CUST##-30
a) Choose Application Administration —>Planning —> Selection Profile Attributes —> Geographical Selection Attributes —*■ Create Geographical Selection Attributes. b) Select the Both Locations checkbox. c) Enter the data in the Source Locations and Destination Locations tabs from the table. d) Save your data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
2. Create a time-related selection attribute. Select the Round Horizon to Full Days checkbox. Use the following data: Field
Value
Time-Rel. Set. Attributes
TIME-##
Description
Selection Horizon for Group ##
Absolute/Relative Horizon
Use Relative Horizon
Factory Cal. for Offs/Dur. Calc
US
Use Index Time for Selection
Use Index Time of Stop
Comb, of Pick-Up and Delivery Windows
Combination with OR
Pick-Up Days
180
Offset Direction
Future
Offset in Days
0
Delivery in Days
200
Offset Direction
Future
Offset in Days
0
a) Choose Application Administration —>Planning —► Selection Profile Attributes —> TimeRelated Selection Attributes —> Create Time-Related Selection Attributes. b) Enter the data from the table. c) Save your data. 3. Create an additional selection attribute. Use the profile to restrict those freight units whose status is not planned, partially planned, and planned. Field
Value
Additional Sel. Attributes
ASEL-##
Description
Freight Units ##
Planned Requirements
Include in Selection
Documents Blocked for Planning
Exclude in Selection
Selection Values tab:Sus/ness Object
/SCMTMS/TO
Selection Values tab: Field Name
PLAN_S TATU S_ROOT
Selection Values tab: Sign
Inclusive
Selection Values tab:Opf/on
Within Range
Selection Values tab -.Lower Limit
01
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Selection Values tab'.Upper Limit
03
a) Choose Application Administration —>Planning —> Selection Profile Attributes —> Additional Selection Attributes —► Create Additional Selection Attributes. b) In the Selection Values tab, enter the data from the table. c) Save your data. 4. Create a selection profile for your group. Use the following data:_________________ Field
Value
Selection Profile
SEL-##
Description
Selection Profile for ##
Maximum number of selected objects
200
Time-Related Sel. Attributes
TIME-##
Geographical Sel. Attributes
GEO-##
Additional Sel. Attributes
ASEL-##
a) Choose Application Administration —>Planning —> Selection Profiles —> Create Selection Profile. b) Enter the data from the table. c) Save your data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Define selection profiles
•
Create a geographical selection profile
•
Create time selection profiles
•
Create additional selection profiles
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 5 Lesson 3 Creating Planning Profiles
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you examine the planning profiles that can be created and used to influence and control the outcome of the optimizer in both interactive and background planning. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Examine planning profiles
•
Examine planning strategies
•
Create a strategy
Planning Profiles When performing interactive or background VSR planning, users must specify a planning profile. During planning, the system considers the settings that you make in the various planning profiles.
Planning Profile
Capacity Selection Settings
Optimizer Settings
Planning Cost Settings
Incompatibility Settings
Carrier Selection Settings
Load Planning Settings
Steps for setup of the planning profile: 1. Create a planning profile. 2. Create capacity selection settings (optional when only using transactional capacity). 3. Create optimizer settings. 4. Create planning cost settings. 5. Create incompatibility settings (optional). 6. Create carrier selection settings (optional). 7. Create load planning settings. 8. Assign subprofiles to planning profile. 9. Test settings in the transportation cockpit and planning.
Figure 95: Link between Planning Profile and Settings
Sub Profiles
Before optimizer planning, three sub profiles must be defined: •
Capacity Selection Settings
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
•
Optimizer Settings
•
Planning Cost Settings
Strategies
The following strategies are defined in the planning profile: •
Manual planning (standard strategy v s r i _ d e f )
•
Scheduling (standard strategy v s s _ d e f )
•
Checks (standard strategy v s r _ C h e c k ). The system checks capacities, incompatibilities, and multiresources, and performs a dangerous goods check.
•
Planning (standard strategies
vsr_ def
and
v s r _ is t e p
). Y ou define this strategy in the
optim izer settings.
•
Planning for transportation proposals (standard strategies v s r _ d e f and v s r _ 1 S T E P ). Y ou define this strategy in the optimizer settings.
Manual Planning Strategy A manual planning strategy is assigned to the planning profile. It controls which planning strategy is used when manual planning is carried out in the transportation cockpit. The following standard planning strategies are provided for manual planning: •
VSRI_1STEP: Interactive Planning and Carrier Selection
•
VSRI_CHK: Interactive Planning Strategy and check
•
VSRI_DEF: Default Interactive Planning Strategy
•
VSRI_SCH: Interactive Planning and Scheduling
Planning Horizons The planning horizon is the time horizon in which freight orders and freight bookings can be created in the transportation cockpit. You define the planning horizon in the planning profile. The planning horizon defines the possible period of time in which the system can schedule transportation activities such as loading and unloading, and transport.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Current Date
'—
End of Planning Horizon (Start of Planning Horizon + Duration)
Start of Planning Horizon (Current Date + Offset)
V'—
_'
Offset
—Y " Planning Horizon
H Transportation Activity Figure 96: Demand Horizons
The planning horizon is defined in the planning profile in days, hours, and minutes. The planning horizon starts at the current system time unless an offset is defined in the planning profile. The offset can be defined in both the past and the future. Business Document Determination Rule The business document determination rule defines which document types are used when freight orders and freight bookings are created during planning. The business document determination rule is defined for each planning profile and applies to documents created either manually or by the VSR optimizer. Business Document Type Determination
Freight order types and freight booking types can be determined in 3 ways. This is defined by the business document determination rule: -
The default type defined in customizing is used.
-
The type is defined in the planning profile directly, for example, vehicle resource, booking for air, booking for ocean, and passive vehicle.
-
The type is defined in a condition with condition type
/
scm tm s/ tor_ ty p e
Scheduling Strategy The schedule strategy defines the actions that are performed when scheduling is launched for a freight order or freight booking in the transportation cockpit. SAP delivers a standard schedule strategy: VSS_DEF. The schedule strategy is assigned to the planning profile. Here, we define if the system considers the dates in the freight unit as constraints and whether a backward or forward scheduling direction is used. The Check Strategy The check strategy defines the actions that are performed when a check is launched for a freight order or freight booking in the transportation cockpit.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
SAP delivers a standard strategy: VSR_CHECK. This verifies capacities, incompatibilities, multi resource assignments and performs a dangerous goods check. The check strategy is assigned to the planning profile where we also define if the system should raise an error message, a warning message, or no message at all whenever a vehicle is overloaded. Times for Loading and Unloading This concept examines loading and unloading times. Activities Relevant to Scheduling
•
Loading / Pick-up
•
Transportation/Travel
•
Unloading /Delivery
•
Couple
•
Uncouple
Loading / Unloading Times
•
Defined in the planning profile
•
Constant
•
Condition based (FU and MOT dependent)
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 5 Exercise 18 Create a Planning Profile
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create a planning profile to be used during transportation planning. 1. In NWBC, create optimizer settings for your group using the following data: Field
Value
Optimizer Settings
OPT-##
Description
Optimizer Setting for Group ##
Planning Strategy
VSR_DEF
FO Building Rule
New Freight Order When Resource is Empty
Accept Transp. Prop
Save Route and Freight Documents
Planning Strategy for Transp. Prop
VSR_DEF
Max. No. of Parallel Processes
1
Maximum Run time (seconds)
30
Automatic Runtime Regulation
Not used
Consider Capacities During Optimization
Yes
Rough Planning
Do not use rough planning
Maximum No. of Transshipment Loc
6
2. Create a planning profile for your group. Select the Round Horizon To Full Days checkbox and use the following data: Field
Value
Planning Profile
PLAN-##
Description
Planning Profile for Group ##
Duration in Days
30
Factory Cal. for Offs/Dur. Calc
US
Time Zone for Rounding the Horizon
CST
Type Determination Rule
Defined per Category in Planning Profile
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Default Type for Road FO
TM##
Manual Planning Strategy
VSRI_SCH
Consider Fixing Status
Warning When Changing Fixed Documents
Scheduling Strategy
VSS_DEF
Consider Freight Unit Dates
Consider Freight Unit Dates
Scheduling Direction
Backward
Check Strategy
VSR_Check
Take Capacities into Account
Warning
Dependence
Freight Unit and MTr Independent
Loading/Unloading time
0 0 :10:00
Optimizer Settings
OPT-##
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Create a Planning Profile
Business Example ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create a planning profile to be used during transportation planning. 1. In NWBC, create optimizer settings for your group using the following data: Field
Value
Optimizer Settings
OPT-##
Description
Optimizer Setting for Group ##
Planning Strategy
VSR_DEF
FO Building Rule
New Freight Order When Resource is Empty
Accept Transp. Prop
Save Route and Freight Documents
Planning Strategy for Transp. Prop
VSR_DEF
Max. No. of Parallel Processes
1
Maximum Run time (seconds)
30
Automatic Runtime Regulation
Not used
Consider Capacities During Optimization
Yes
Rough Planning
Do not use rough planning
Maximum No. of Transshipment Loc
6
a) Open the Application Administration folder and choose Planning —> Planning Profile Settings —*■ Optimizer Settings —*■ Create Optimizer Settings. b) Enter the data from the table. c) Save your data. 2. Create a planning profile for your group. Select the Round Horizon To Full Days checkbox and use the following data: Field
Value
Planning Profile
PLAN-##
Description
Planning Profile for Group ##
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Duration in Days
30
Factory Cal. for Offs/Dur. Calc
US
Time Zone for Rounding the Horizon
CST
Type Determination Rule
Defined per Category in Planning Profile
Default Type for Road FO
TM##
Manual Planning Strategy
VSRI_SCH
Consider Fixing Status
Warning When Changing Fixed Documents
Scheduling Strategy
VSS_DEF
Consider Freight Unit Dates
Consider Freight Unit Dates
Scheduling Direction
Backward
Check Strategy
VSR_Check
Take Capacities into Account
Warning
Dependence
Freight Unit and MTr Independent
Loading/Unloading time
0 0 :10:00
Optimizer Settings
OPT-##
a) In NWBC, open the Application Administration folder and choose Planning —> Planning Profiles —> Create Planning Profile. b) Enter the data from the table. c) Accept the remaining default settings. d) Save your data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Optimizer Planning Strategies
Service (Task)
VSR Strategy (How)
VSR_DEF Methods (What) 10 - Program 1 20- Program 2 -- 30-Program 3 40 - Program 4 50 - Program 5
VSR_PRE VSR_PRE_DG VSR_OPT VSR_POST VSR DG CHK
Figure 97: Optimizer Planning Strategies
In SAP TM, many of the activities that make up transportation planning are managed by a tool called the Process Controller. Process Controller The process controller is a framework with which you can define your own strategies, methods, and how your planning process is executed. You can use strategies to define complete processes. By assigning a service, you define the area in which the process is to be used, for example, transportation charge management, freight unit building, or VSR optimization. SAP delivers a number of standard strategies. Methods define the individual process steps of a strategy. You assign a service to each method. Strategies in SAP TM You use strategies in SAP Transportation Management in the following areas: •
Freight unit building
•
Carrier selection
•
VSR optimization
•
Manual planning
•
Change controller
•
Definition of customer-specific functions
You use planning strategies to define the planning steps that the system is to perform and the sequence in which it is to perform them. Each planning strategy comprises one or more methods that represent the individual planning steps.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
The Transportation Plan VSR optimization generates a transportation plan from the optimization data consisting of planned freight orders. It processes freight orders already available from a previous VSR optimization run or manual planning. VSR optimization inserts the freight units into the transportation plan and modifies these initial solutions by, for example, loading a freight unit on to another capacity or by changing the delivery sequence of a capacity. The optimizer tries to minimize the total costs while adhering to the constraints. At the end of the planning run, VSR optimization returns the best solution found. You can generate multiple alternative transportation proposals for each freight unit. You can then choose to use one of them. SAP delivers the planning strategies VSR_DEF and VSR_1STEP as standard for the optimization. You can use the planning strategy VSR_1STEP to control whether the system is to perform carrier selection immediately after VSR optimization. The results of the VSR optimization run are explained in the explanation tool.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Examine planning profiles
•
Examine planning strategies
•
Create a strategy
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Creating Capacity Selection Settings
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson you will learn about capacity selection settings and consider the impact of these on transportation planning. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Create capacity selection settings
Capacity Selection Settings
*
Capacity Selection Settings
Planning Profile
Optmcer Settings
Planning Costs Settings
I
General Data Capecty Selection Settngs Description N/etMcle Resources
CAPA_3100_00 Capec«y 3100-00
Container Resources
Transportabcn Mode Description
Schedules
Atmoutes tor Vehcle Resource VEHKXERESJO
Inclusive
Pattern
US-CU-01
VtmCLERESJO
Inclusive
Pattern
US-FTL-01
Figure 98: Capacity Selection Settings
The capacity selection settings define which vehicle resources and schedules are selected for transportation planning. This setting involves selecting the resource capacity in the transportation cockpit. Many fields in the resource can be used for selection. Schedules are also selected based on the criteria defined in the capacity selection settings.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Create a Capacity Selection Profile
Business Example ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create a planning profile to be used during transportation planning.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of all exercises in unit three of this course.
1. In NWBC, create a capacity selection profile. Create two lines in the Vehicle Resources screen area. Use the following data: Field
Value
Capacity Selection Settings
CAPA-##
Description
Capacity Selection Profile for Group ##
Attributes for Vehicle Resource Selection
MTRTCO062 I (use F4 to search for the selection)
Sign
Inclusive
Option
=
Lower Limit
FTL-##
Attributes for Vehicle Resource Selection
MTRTCO062 I (use F4 to search for the selection)
Sign
Inclusive
Option
=
Lower Limit
LTL-##
2. Assign your capacity selection profile CAPA-## to your planning profile PLAN-##.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 5 Solution 19 Create a Capacity Selection Profile
Business Example ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create a planning profile to be used during transportation planning.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of all exercises in unit three of this course.
1. In NWBC, create a capacity selection profile. Create two lines in the Vehicle Resources screen area. Use the following data: Field
Value
Capacity Selection Settings
CAPA-##
Description
Capacity Selection Profile for Group ##
Attributes for Vehicle Resource Selection
MTRTCO062 I (use F4 to search for the selection)
Sign
Inclusive
Option
=
Lower Limit
FTL-##
Attributes for Vehicle Resource Selection
MTRTCO062 I (use F4 to search for the selection)
Sign
Inclusive
Option
=
Lower Limit
LTL-##
a) Open the Application Administration folder and choose Planning —>Planning Profile Settings —>Capacity Selection Settings —► Create Capacity Selection Settings. b) Use the data in the table to create your selection attributes. c) Save your data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
2. Assign your capacity selection profile CAPA-## to your planning profile PLAN-##. a) Open the Application Administration folder and choose the menu path Planning —► Planning Profiles —> Edit Planning Profile. b) Enter
p l a n
-# #
and choose Continue.
c) In the Profile Assignments screen area, in the Capacity Selection Settings field, enter C A P A -# # .
d) Save your data.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Create capacity selection settings
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 5
Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following do you assign to a selection profile? Choose the correct answers. | A Geographical selection attributes B Capacity selection settings | C Carrier selection settings D Additional selection attributes 2. In the time-related selection attributes, which of the following do you define? Choose the correct answer. | A Source and destination locations B Additional attributes for database queries | C The demand horizon 3. Which of the following do you assign to a planning profile? Choose the correct answers. | A Capacity selection attributes B Geographical selection attributes | C Additional selection attributes D Carrier selection attributes
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
4. In which of the following areas in SAP TM can you use strategies to define the planning steps that the system is to perform and the sequence in which it is to perform them? Choose the correct answers. | A Freight unit building B VSR optimization C Manual planning D Applying calendar resources 5. The capacity selection settings define which vehicle resources are selected for transportation planning. Determine whether this statement is true or false. | True False
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 5
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which of the following do you assign to a selection profile? Choose the correct answers. [x ] A Geographical selection attributes B Capacity selection settings | C Carrier selection settings [x ] D Additional selection attributes That is correct. You assign geographical selection attributes and additional selection attributes to a selection profile. 2. In the time-related selection attributes, which of the following do you define? Choose the correct answer. | A Source and destination locations B Additional attributes for database queries [x ] C The demand horizon That is correct. You can define the demand horizon in the time-related selection attributes. 3. Which of the following do you assign to a planning profile? Choose the correct answers. [x ] A Capacity selection attributes B Geographical selection attributes | C Additional selection attributes [x ] D Carrier selection attributes That is correct. You can assign capacity selection settings and carrier selection settings to a planning profile.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
4. In which of the following areas in SAP TM can you use strategies to define the planning steps that the system is to perform and the sequence in which it is to perform them? Choose the correct answers.
|~xj
A Freight unit building
|~xj
B VSR optimization
|~xj
C Manual planning D Applying calendar resources
That is correct. You can use strategies in freight unit building, VSR optimization, manual planning, carrier selection, the definition of customer-specific functions, and in the change controller. 5. The capacity selection settings define which vehicle resources are selected for transportation planning. Determine whether this statement is true or false. [x ] True False That is correct. The capacity selection settings define which vehicle resources are selected for transportation planning.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
UNIT 6
Interactive Planning with the Transportation Cockpit
Lesson 1 Customizing the Transportation Cockpit Layout Exercise 20: Create a Profile and Layout Set
258 265
Lesson 2 Customizing the Transportation Cockpit Exercise 21: Customize the Transportation Cockpit
270 271
Lesson 3 Performing Interactive Planning
277
Exercise 22: Create Freight Orders Interactively
281
Lesson 4 Examining Freight Order Scheduling Exercise 23: Schedule a Freight Order
289 293
UNIT OBJECTIVES
•
Identify profile and layout set usage in the transportation cockpit
•
Create a profile and layout set
•
Identify the settings required to customize the transportation cockpit
•
Create freight orders using drag and drop
•
Create freight orders using the command line
•
Create freight orders using the interactive map
•
Perform interactive planning
•
Identify freight order scheduling options
•
Examine the optimizer planning log
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Unit 6 Lesson 1 Customizing the Transportation Cockpit Layout
LESSON OVERVIEW Once your network is defined and integration is enabled, your business can begin transportation planning. In this lesson, you look at the tools that support planning in SAP TM. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Identify profile and layout set usage in the transportation cockpit
•
Create a profile and layout set
Transportation Cockpit
Menu bar
Freight Units
Freight Orders Freight Bookings
Vehicle Resources Schedules
Freight Order Details
Figure 99: Transportation Cockpit: Main Screen
Transportation planning, including freight order creation, is conducted in the transportation cockpit. The transportation cockpit is the main Ul for most planning activities. Transportation requirements, resources, and freight orders can all be seen in the transportation cockpit.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Profile and Layout Sets Profile and Layout Sets SUrtfKnuig @
Q
Stt1 PUmit}n BtCtyotAd J
ijj
Refresn Stfj.rwrr’l
Dwoxeor
»
e
/)> ,tro.t Pwechitaaofl
Re* Setedo- ProUe
Pen*ng Prone
're^lOrae'Seiecsefl Prole
Cepetty Se»do* $«9r;a
PUA.FWO
PUA.TP
(KA.FO
PUA.CSS
rcarpUMy Searjs
PUAUywl
T»»WliW Co;ApeUyout
Test ArBoetr; order
PUA.ttC.r
PUA_TP.1t
(KA_ttQ.l1
T«tt Buwms Shires
PUA_ttC_0t
PUA.TP.Ot
(KA.ttQ.01
PUA.CSS.91
PUALeytut
SurdardUyeut
Test Co*tedDfttmroich
PUA.ttC.09
PUA.TP.09
(KA.ttQ.09
PUA.CSS.09
9UAUy:«l
TMtCvtedtatnv-tfcflVv 2
PUA_R£C_09_02
PUA.TP.09
(KA_*O_09_»2
PUA.CSS.99
PUALeycul
Test Cr»CShow1
PUA.ttC.C7
PUA.TP
(KA.F0.07
PUA.CSS.97
Sander*Uywt
TttfNTRcWllMlN
PUA.ttC.C6
PUA.TP
TestHmn Pw-nj
PUA.ttC.C8
PUA.TP.06
Test Umtii awn* /OPRTires
PUA.ttC.OS
PUA.TP.02
PUA.CSS.t5
SterderdLiyem
Test Pw'flj ‘Ccrtsfrirts
PUA.ttC.Ol
PUA.TP
PUA.CSS.0A-C1
PUAUyad
Teni-r«h
PUA.ttC.B2
PUA.TP
(KA.F0
PUA.CS5.t2
Sl'dar* llytu!
Test ponriig aOi scftedv*
PUA_ttC_C3
PUA.TP
(KA.FQ.OJ
PUA.CSS.03
Stardarduyeu!
(KA.FO.OI
The profiles allow control on a granular level: • Requirement selection • Capacity selection • Planning settings
PUA.CSS.C6
Sardr* Uysu:
puA.css.ce
PUAtfton
Typically, profiles are set up by planning scenario: • Plan main-leg for time-critical requirements from Europe to US • Plan all LTL from plant to Nordic countries • Plan on-carriage from distribution center to customers using own fleet
Figure 100: Transportation Cockpit Profiles
You use this function to define a profile that you use to enter a planning area. You can also define the layout of the corresponding user interface in this set. Profile and layout sets are used to distinguish between different planning areas or functions. One profile and layout set can be assigned as the default. In the transportation cockpit, you can change the set you want to use by choosing the Change Profile Selection button. Alternatively, go back to the profile selection screen. You use this function in carrier selection when calling the transportation cockpit, and in the creation of delivery proposals. Layout Sets The following are examples of different layout sets: •
A set for a planner who plans the next day
•
A set for a dispatcher who makes the planning changes for today
•
A set for an air and ocean planner
•
A set for carrier selection
•
A set for each area planner per country or region
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Transportation C ockpit Screen Areas
Requirements Area Requirement Groups Area
S\
Freight Units /Freight Unit Stages
• Transportation Units Area
Trailer/ Railcar /Container Unit
• Orders Area • Order DetailsArea
Freight Orders /Bookings (with detail)
Resources Area
Vehicle /TU resources /Schedules
HierarchiesArea
All Hierarchies
Gantt Chart Area Map Area
Interactive /Visual Planning
Figure 102: Screen Areas for Transportation Cockpit
The different screen areas can be combined into different layouts, displaying the relevant information for the planner in different planning situations. Visual elements like maps and gantt charts help the user to grasp relevant information.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Transportation C ockpit M ap
UTAH
-“ W
*
O
Find Resources Nearby
1. rm riOfno Stare A O itu i © Otar Am k s s Stare Stow Otta-to Routt* Stow SW fU M Routtt Dtpa/ LtgttO Rttovt M«t*srw>a Fr>o TratsconatOfl Dfar>4* Metrej la Ft F r j RtCv Cft Start, Ptractttft
X
50 000
•Distance Distance UoM:
□
KM
OK
Cancel
FCWIiCXtCO
Context-based planning Search Address Cear Address Search ShowDeta ed Routes Show StragM-L ne Routes Dspay Legend Remove Hghfeghtmg Frd Trarsportator De-ands Nearby F rd Resources Nearby
Find Transportation Demands Nearby □ •Ontanct
X
5 000 km
|
tcw io u co
xnix |y t= v/Tuceoa _ 0 ___ L . l
Figure 103: Visual Planning: Map
The map can be displayed as one screen area in the transportation cockpit or in full screen. However, having the map displayed as one screen area enables the planner to directly see the selected freight units, freight orders or bookings, transportation units, and resources on the map. The map can show multiple objects at the same time. In order to display selected objects on the map, the map needs to be updated choosing Update Map —*• Selected Entries Only or All. As with all screen areas, the map area can be maximized to use it in full screen mode as well. The map can also be used to find objects, such as resources or transportation demands (i.e. freight units and transportation units). The planner can right click on a position on the map and choose either Find Transportation Demands Nearby or Find Resources Nearby from the context menu. In both cases the planner needs to specify a radius for the search. After confirming the popup, the results are displayed on the map.
Note: Please note that only resources are displayed that were selected with the capacity selection settings, or with search criteria, prior to entering the transportation cockpit. Resources that were not selected into the transportation cockpit are not displayed, even though they might be within the search radius. The same applies to the transportation demands. Only transportation units and freight units are displayed that were previously selected into the transportation cockpit.
G antt C hart
Table 1: Visual Planning: Gantt Chart Visibility
Interactivity
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
•
Usage of trucks and trailers
•
Load utilization of trucks and trailers
•
Downtimes and nonworking times
•
Execution status and reported times for freight orders, trailer units, and their activities
•
•
Assign and schedule trucks and trailers by drag and drop
•
Re-sequencing by drag and drop
•
Fix and unfix freight orders, trailer units, and their activities
•
Context menus and hyperlinks
Notifications for overload, empty movements, and time conflicts
Usability and Flexibility
Planning Scenarios
•
Time zoom in and out
•
•
Aggregated and detailed view
Truck planning (freight orders and truck resources)
•
Hierarchical views
•
Truck and trailer planning (trailer units and trailer resources)
•
Single and dual view (horizontal and verti cal)
•
Re-planning based on events from execu tion
Gantt Chart: Transportation Cockpit
When performing transportation planning, a planner usually considers two main aspects: availability of resources and utilization of the used resources. With the conventional use of the transportation cockpit, the sequential order of freight orders using a particular resource, and the availability of a resource for a certain timeframe, is not (graphically) shown. Using a Gantt chart, which is often used in project planning as well, helps to visualize the availability of resources and the sequential order of transports. The Gantt chart is fully integrated into the transportation cockpit. In the Gantt chart, freight orders and vehicle resources are displayed as a time bar and planners can manually plan transports by using drag and drop. The Gantt chart is a screen area in the transportation cockpit which can be enabled in a page layout for transportation cockpits. All standard functionalities, like positioning the Gantt chart anywhere on the transportation cockpit or maximizing the screen area to full screen, are available for the Gantt chart too. A zoom bar on top of the screen area can zoom in and out to see a more detailed view of a day or week, or a more general view of the year. An important factor for transportation planning is the utilization of a vehicle. The utilization of the vehicle can be displayed with the utilization view, which can be enabled when needed. The utilization view shows the utilization of the vehicle over time in a graph. The graph is displayed in a detail line below the actual resource or document. In this case, the single-view is chosen. This enables the user to see all of the execution information within one screen. Multiple loading acts are only displayed as one item in the Gantt chart. This keeps the chart clean and easy to understand.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Drag and Drop Functionalities •
Change relative stop sequence of a freight order or transportation unit.
•
Reassign stop to a different vehicle, freight order, or transportation unit.
•
Reschedule a freight order or transportation unit.
•
Assign a freight order or transportation unit to a resource (truck or trailer).
Interactive planning can be performed in the Gantt chart using drag and drop. Unplanned freight orders can be assigned to resources. Likewise, resources can be assigned to freight orders. The freight order is dropped on the time bar of the resource. If the freight order is not dropped at the same date it was originally planned, the date where it was dropped is taken over into the freight order. Scheduling is only performed when requested using the Scheduling button on top of the Gantt chart. The dual-view can be selected to have the unplanned freight orders displayed on top and the available resources below. This enables the user to work with one window to plan freight orders. The dual-view can either be displayed horizontally or vertically. The size of each area can be changed by dragging with the mouse. The Gantt chart enables the panning of unplanned freight orders by dragging on vehicle resources, as well as the creation of transportation units. When dragging and dropping the loading activity of one freight order into the time bar of another freight order, both freight orders are combined. Overlap means the resource was planned multiple times and is therefore not executable. For example, if the trailer is already planned and newly planned in a later step, this would cause an overlap which the user gets displayed as a red line. Similar to the utilization view, an overlap view shows if several documents on a resource overlap. This overlap can be overcome by scheduling the resource. Gantt Chart Appearance Customization Cockpit
■
Configurability ♦ Colors schemes & patterns for activities and documents ♦ Fields and field lists ♦ Hierarchies ♦ Views ♦ Layouts
Cockpit Layout | 1 0...1 Gantt Ch art Areal 1 Customizing 1 Gantt Chart Layout * *
* _Views
1 F-
* *. Hferarchies" J 1...2C
Figure 104: Customizing Gantt Chart Appearance
The Gantt chart displays planned and unplanned freight orders and resources in a time bar. The planner can configure which additional sets of information should be displayed next to the time bar. The time bar itself shows the activities planned for the document and resource. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Depending on the layout chosen the planner can use a single view, which only shows planned and unplanned freight orders or resources exclusively, or a dual view that displays two entities next to each other. Similar to the dual view in the transportation cockpit, the dual view in the Gantt chart can be configured vertically or horizontally. The scrollbars of both screen areas can be synchronized. SAP offers comprehensive customizing pre-settings. With these settings, the user can start immediately to work with the system, as he can use the default settings. In customizing, using the IMG path SAP Transportation Management —> Transportation Management —*■ Basic Functions —» Gantt Chart, the Gantt chart can be configured to the planner’s needs. The layout of a Gantt chart can consist of several views. A view describes firstly whether the Gantt chart is single or dual view, and secondly what the hierarchy looks like if a hierarchy is required. The Gantt chart layout can have several views or defined hierarchies assigned. The user can then switch between different views, but only between the views that were assigned to the layout used. The layout is assigned in the page layout of the transportation cockpit. When using hierarchies, information of different documents is displayed in the same table. When using standard columns for the different documents, many columns will be empty. Therefore, a field list can be defined in Customizing. The field list defines columns that should be displayed in the Gantt chart. For a field of the field list it can be defined, which data source should be displayed in this column, depending on the document used. The appearance of the Gantt chart can be customized as well. A color can be defined with its color code. It can then be used in a color scheme. Color schemes can be defined for documents, activities, and resources. Document types and statuses, as well as activity types and statuses, can then be assigned to a color scheme. Furthermore, color schemes can be assigned to the Gantt chart layout.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Create a Profile and Layout Set
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain the planning functionalities available in SAP TM to the client's transportation planner. 1. In NWBC, create your page layout (Layout-##) for the transportation cockpit. Select the Activate Command Line checkbox. Leave the Requirements Group Area as not visible. Use the following data: Requirements Area Field
Value
Position of Screen Area
Top Left
Width
100%
Orders Area Field
Value
Position of Screen Area
Middle Right
Width
50%
Order Details Area Field
Value
Position of Screen Area
Bottom Left
Width
100%
Resources Area Field
Value
Position of Screen Area
Middle Left
Width
50%
2. Create a profile and layout set for your group. Use the following data and select the default checkbox:
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Field
Value
Selection Profile for FU
SEL-##
Planning Profile
PLAN-##
Selection Profile for FO
SEL-##
Selection Profile (FBs)
SEL-##
Selection Profile (TUs)
SEL-##
Transportation Cockpit Layout
Layout-##
Layout for Planning Result Screen
Standard Layout
Description
Cockpit Layout for Group ##
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
Create a Profile and Layout Set
Business Example ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain the planning functionalities available in SAP TM to the client's transportation planner. 1. In NWBC, create your page layout (Layout-##) for the transportation cockpit. Select the Activate Command Line checkbox. Leave the Requirements Group Area as not visible. Use the following data: Requirements Area Field
Value
Position of Screen Area
Top Left
Width
100%
Orders Area Field
Value
Position of Screen Area
Middle Right
Width
50%
Order Details Area Field
Value
Position of Screen Area
Bottom Left
Width
100%
Resources Area Field
Value
Position of Screen Area
Middle Left
Width
50%
a) Application Administration —>Planning —> General Settings —> Page Layouts —> Page Layouts for Transportation Cockpit. b) Choose New.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At :
[email protected]
c) Enter the following data: Field
Value
Page Layout
Layout-##
Validity
User
User
Activate Command Line
Select
d) Review the Visibility options. Do not deselect any of these checkboxes. e) Enter the data from the tables in the Requirements Area tab and do not make any other changes. f) Enter the data in the Orders Area tab and do not make any other changes. g) Enter the data in the Order Details Area tab and do not make any other changes. h) Enter the data in the Capacities Area tab and do not make any other changes. i) Save your new page layout. 2. Create a profile and layout set for your group. Use the following data and select the default checkbox: Field
Value
Selection Profile for FU
SEL-##
Planning Profile
PLAN-##
Selection Profile for FO
SEL-##
Selection Profile (FBs)
SEL-##
Selection Profile (TUs)
SEL-##
Transportation Cockpit Layout
Layout-##
Layout for Planning Result Screen
Standard Layout
Description
Cockpit Layout for Group ##
a) Open the Planning folder and choose Planning —> Transportation Cockpit. b) Choose Change Profile Selection —► Profile Selection Screen. This step is only required if you have entered and saved one selection before. c) Choose New. d) Enter the data from the table to create your profile and layout set. e) Save your data. f) Select your profile and layout set and choose Continue to go to the cockpit.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Identify profile and layout set usage in the transportation cockpit
•
Create a profile and layout set
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 6 Lesson 2 Customizing the Transportation Cockpit
LESSON OVERVIEW To support your planning needs, you can change the layout of your transportation cockpit. In this lesson, we examine the settings available to customize the transportation cockpit in SAP TM. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Identify the settings required to customize the transportation cockpit
Customization Settings for the Transportation Cockpit The following changes can be made to the layout of the transportation cockpit: •
The time zone in which to present time-related information
•
Unit for distance
•
The position and width of the tabs on screen
•
The visibility of tabs
•
The sequence and number of rows and columns visible
You can change the layout to suit your requirements by choosing the Page Layout button. For example, you can change to a layout that displays the command line and so allows command line planning.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Customize the Transportation Cockpit
Business Example ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, wants to personalize the transportation cockpit to suit her requirements for transportation planning.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Create a Profile and Layout Set.
1.
In NWBC, enter the transportation cockpit with your selection profile for FOs, FBs, TUs and FUs and your planning profile. Use the following data: Field
Value
Selection Profile (FOs)
SEL-# #
Selection Profile (FBs)
SEL-# #
Selection Profile (FUs)
S E L -# #
Selection Profile (TUs)
S E L -# #
Planning Profile
P L A N -# #
2. Personalize your transportation cockpit layout by changing the displayed distance unit from KM to Ml using the following data: Field
Value
Individual Unit radio button
Select
Individual Unit
M I
3. Personalize the Freight Unit Stages screen area. Add the Original Order, Original Delivery, and Index from the Available Columns to the Displayed Columns. Choose to Display this View on Open. Save as f u - # # s t a g e s . 4. Personalize the Vehicles screen area. Add the Index from the Available Columns to the Displayed columns. Choose to Display this View on Open. Save as Vehicles-##.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
5. Personalize the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings screen area. Add the Index and carrier description from the Available Columns to the Displayed Columns. Choose to Display this View on Open. Save as FreightOrders-##. 6. Rearrange the size of the screen elements to fit your screen. 7. Maximize the Vehicles screen area to review details about the selected vehicles. What is the maximum weight of vehicles resources FTL-## and LTL-##? Return to your cockpit layout.
8. Export the content of the vehicles area to a spreadsheet. 9. Show the large map in the transportation cockpit with all objects. Why does your vehicle resource appear in the Atlantic ocean to the south-west of Africa?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Customize the Transportation Cockpit
Business Example ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, wants to personalize the transportation cockpit to suit her requirements for transportation planning.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Create a Profile and Layout Set.
1. In NWBC, enter the transportation cockpit with your selection profile for FOs, FBs, TUs and FUs and your planning profile. Use the following data: Field
Value
Selection Profile (FOs)
SEL-##
Selection Profile (FBs)
SEL-##
Selection Profile (FUs)
SEL-##
Selection Profile (TUs)
SEL-##
Planning Profile
PLAN-##
a) Choose Planning —>Planning —> Transportation Cockpit. b) Select the line with your selection profile for freights orders, freight bookings, transportation units and freight units SEL-##, and planning profile PLAN-## and continue. 2. Personalize your transportation cockpit layout by changing the displayed distance unit from KM to Ml using the following data: Field
Value
Individual Unit radio button
Select
Individual Unit
MI
a) In the Main screen area, choose £ * Settings to show the list of available settings.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
b) Enter the data from the table. c) Choose OK. 3. Personalize the Freight Unit Stages screen area. Add the Original Order, Original Delivery, and Index from the Available Columns to the Displayed Columns. Choose to Display this View on Open. Save as f u -## stages. a) In the Freight Unit Stages screen area, choose 0 ^ Personalize to show the list of available settings. b) Move Original Order, Original Delivery, and Index from the Available Column to the Displayed Column using the arrows. c) Select the Display this View on Open checkbox. d) Save as f u -## stages. e) Save your data. 4. Personalize the Vehicles screen area. Add the Index from the Available Columns to the Displayed columns. Choose to Display this View on Open. Save as Vehicles-##. a) In the Vehicles screen area, choose Ojt, Personalize to show the list of available settings. b) Move Index from the Available Column to the Displayed Column using the arrows. c) Select the Display this View on Open checkbox. d) Save as Vehicles—##. e) Save your data. 5. Personalize the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area. Add the Index and carrier description from the Available Columns to the Displayed Columns. Choose to Display this View on Open. Save as FreightOrders-##. a) In the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings screen area, choose 0 ^ Personalize to show the list of available settings. b) Move Index and Carrier Description from the Available Column to the Displayed Column using the arrows. c) Select the Display this View on Open checkbox. d) Save a s FreightOrders—##. e) Save your data. 6. Rearrange the size of the screen elements to fit your screen. a) Adjust the screen area using the ellipses button in the center at the bottom of each screen area.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
7. Maximize the Vehicles screen area to review details about the selected vehicles. What is the maximum weight of vehicles resources FTL-## and LTL-##? Return to your cockpit layout. The maximum weight of FTL-## is 45000 LB and the maximum weight of LTL-## is 25000 LET__________________________________________________________________________ a) In the Vehicles screen area, choose Maximize. b) Choose Restore. 8. Export the content of the vehicles area to a spreadsheet. a) In the Vehicles screen area, choose Jg] Export to Spreadsheet. b) Review the content of the spreadsheet. c) Close the spreadsheet and return to the transportation cockpit. 9. Show the large map in the transportation cockpit with all objects. Why does your vehicle resource appear in the Atlantic ocean to the south-west of Africa? Because you have not created any data yet, the only objects that are selected are your vehicle resources FTL-## and LTL##. The vehicle resources appear with geoocoordinates of longitude 0 and latitude 0, which is in the Atlantic ocean.______________________________
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Identify the settings required to customize the transportation cockpit
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 6 Lesson 3 Performing Interactive Planning
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will learn about the interactive planning functions in the transportation cockpit. We will examine the use of drag-and-drop functionality in the creation of freight orders, and consider how the command line enables mouse-free planning of freight orders. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Create freight orders using drag and drop
•
Create freight orders using the command line
•
Create freight orders using the interactive map
•
Perform interactive planning
Drag-and-Drop Freight Order Creation A freight order can be created using the drag-and-drop functionality. Dragging an unplanned freight unit stage to a resource or dragging a resource to an unplanned freight unit stage creates a freight order. Changes to existing documents can also be made using drag-and-drop. It is possible to drag additional freight unit stages to a freight order. With SAP 9.0, you can assign freight units from one freight document to another. Freight Order Creation in the Transportation Cockpit The transportation cockpit in SAP TM allows freight order creation in four different modes: •
Optimized planning in the foreground with or without a selection
•
Manual planning with drag and drop or with command line entries
•
Map-based manual planning
•
Transportation proposals for a limited number of multi-leg or multimodal transport demands
Optimized planning can also be scheduled with a background job. Choose Application Administration —>Background Reports-> Background Planning. Updates to Planning SAP TM offers updates to planning with: •
Rescheduling to postpone stages if the first stage is late.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
•
Re-planning subsequent stages that did not yet trigger the execution of freight units.
•
Changes based on change controller actions. These actions are triggered based on weight, volume, time, reported execution information, and other changes.
•
Optimized re-planning to add additional transportation demands. You can make changes to a freight order and freight booking.
Command Line Freight Order Creation The command line enables mouse-free planning and is an alternative to drag-and-drop planning. Using the command line, the planner instructs the system to assign freight unit stages to vehicles via a single character string. To enable command line planning, an index is assigned to each resource and freight unit stage. The index acts as a unique identifier for every object in the transportation cockpit. Note that vehicle resources are assigned low numbers so that the planner can easily remember them. Planning with the Command Line
When planning with the command line, the planner first enters index numbers that represent the freight unit stages, followed by a dash (-) and a vehicle resource index. Press ENTER, and a freight order is created with the relevant stages and resource assigned. Multiple commands can be specified in one string by using a plus (+) sign to separate them. Example: Simple Planning of Freight Units on a Vehicle Resource
The freight units that you want to plan have the indexes 5, 6, and 7. The vehicle resource that you want to use to transport the freight units has an index of 2. To assign the freight units to the vehicle resource, you enter the following command in the command line:5 6 7 — 2. Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for using command line planning: •
The display of the command line must be activated for the page layout for the transportation cockpit.
•
The index field should be displayed for the freight unit stages and vehicles in the transportation cockpit
The help field of the command line provides additional information. Choose More Field Help in the context menu for the field by clicking the right mouse button. Command Line Layout
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Transportation Cockpit
Menu bar Command line
Freight Units (incl. index numbers)
Vehicle Resources Schedules (incl. index numbers)
Freight Orders Freight Bookings (incl. index numbers)
Freight Order Details
Figure 105: Transportation Cockpit Command Line Layout
The figure shows the command line in the transportation cockpit. Interactive Map Freight Order Creation Freight orders can be created using the interactive map. Freight unit stages and vehicles are both displayed on the map. You can carry out your planning activities on the map. If you select Unplanned Freight Units and Start Planning from the context menu, for example, the system shows the possible assignments of the freight units to the resources. Select the assignments that you require. You can also assign unplanned freight units or multirelations that contain unplanned freight units to resources by using drag and drop. When you do so, you can either assign the freight units to the resource or the resource to the freight units. If you want to split a stage that is displayed on the map, you can assign an unplanned freight unit or multirelation to a location using drag and drop. Once you have selected the required planning option, the system adds the selected location to the freight unit stage and updates the map accordingly. This process also applies to freight orders. You can also display transshipment locations that are not part of your planning activities. You display these locations by choosing Show Related Transshipment Locations from the context menu. If a freight order does not have a vehicle assigned to it, you can also assign the vehicle using drag and drop. To do so, you assign the freight order to a single vehicle resource or a multispot that contains at least one vehicle resource or passive vehicle resource and then select the relevant planning option from the menu. The system displays all of your transportation planning activities on the map. When you leave the full display of the map, your planning activities are also displayed in the table view of the transportation cockpit.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Interactive Updates of Freight Orders Changes can also be made to existing freight orders interactively. Using drag-and-drop, you can drag additional freight unit stages to a freight order. The freight order is updated with the additional freight unit and a stage is added to include the additional stop-off, if required. From the interactive map, you can also drag a freight unit stage to an existing freight order.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 6 Exercise 22 Create Freight Orders Interactively
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain the planning functionalities available in SAP TM to the client's transportation planner.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of all exercises in units three and five of this course, and the exercise Customize the Transportation Cockpit.
1. Create several sales orders so that you have data for planning. Take note of the sales order numbers that you create. Use the following data: Field
Value
Order Type
ZT##
Sales Org
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to Party
CUST##-16 CUST##-17 CUST##-18 CUST##-25 CUST##-26 CUST##-28
PO Number TM200_00
TM2 0 0_0 0
TM200_00
TM2 0 0_0 0
TM200_00
TM200_00
Material
PRODTM-OO PRODTM-OO PRODTM-OO PRODTM-OO PRODTM-OO PRODTM-OO
Quantity
50
50
50
50
50
50
Sales Order Number 2. Create freight units for the order-based transportation requirements created in step 1. 3. To enable map display, you must import a certificate. In SAP TM, enter transaction code WDR_ACF_WLIST. 4. Select the line containing the certificate VB200. 5. Choose Install Certificate and exit the transaction. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
6. In NWBC, enter the transportation cockpit with your planning profile and selection profiles for freight units and freight orders. Use your transportation cockpit layout. Use the following data: Field
Value
Selection Profile for Freight Units
SEL-##
Planning Profile
PLAN-##
Selection Profiles for Freight Orders
SEL-##
Selection Profiles for Freight Bookings
SEL-##
Selection Profiles for Transportation Units
SEL-##
Layout
LAYOUT-##
7. Perform manual planning with FTL-## using drag and drop functionality on your freight unit to CUST##-17. 8. Confirm that a freight order with a temporary freight order number has been created in the order area. 9. Review the freight order in the Overview screen area. Can you explain the durations that have been calculated and that are shown?
10. Perform manual planning with FTL-## on your freight unit to CUST##-18 using the command line. Enter the index number of the freight unit to CUST##-18, the character - and the index number of FTL-##. For example, 5-1. 11. Confirm that a freight order has been created in the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area with a temporary freight order number. 12. Review the freight order in the Overview screen area. Can you explain the durations that have been calculated and that are shown?
13. To perform manual planning using the interactive map, select your freight unit to customer CUST##-16, one of the freight orders to CUST##-17 or CUST##-18 and the vehicles LTL-## and FTL-##. Assign the freight unit to the existing freight order. 14. Can you explain the planning results?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
15. Switch to layout PB_LAYOUT and plan freight unit to CUST##-25 on vehicle FTL-## in the Gantt chart screen area after having maximized this area. 16. Remove any overlaps (if they exist for vehicle FTL-##) by dragging and dropping freight orders in the Gantt view. Why are overlaps allowed in this case?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 6 Solution 22 Create Freight Orders Interactively
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain the planning functionalities available in SAP TM to the client's transportation planner.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of all exercises in units three and five of this course, and the exercise Customize the Transportation Cockpit.
1. Create several sales orders so that you have data for planning. Take note of the sales order numbers that you create. Use the following data: Field
Value
Order Type
ZT##
Sales Org
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to Party
CUST##-16 CUST##-17 CUST##-18 CUST##-25 CUST##-26 CUST##-28
PO Number TM200_00
TM2 0 0_0 0
TM200_00
TM2 0 0_0 0
TM200_00
TM200_00
Material
PRODTM-OO PRODTM-OO PRODTM-OO PRODTM-OO PRODTM-OO PRODTM-OO
Quantity
50
50
50
50
50
50
Sales Order Number
a) In SAP ERP, enter transaction code v a o
i.
b) Enter the data from the first table and continue. c) Enter the data from the second table, saving each time you create a sales order. d) Note your sales order number each time.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
2. Create freight units for the order-based transportation requirements created in step 1. a) Go to ERP Logistics Integration —> Worklists —> Overview Transportation Requirements. b) Highlight the rows with the sales orders that you created in step 1. c) Choose Create Freight Units. 3. To enable map display, you must import a certificate. In SAP TM, enter transaction code WDR_AC F_WL1ST. 4. Select the line containing the certificate VB200. 5. Choose Install Certificate and exit the transaction. 6. In NWBC, enter the transportation cockpit with your planning profile and selection profiles for freight units and freight orders. Use your transportation cockpit layout. Use the following data: Field
Value
Selection Profile for Freight Units
SEL-##
Planning Profile
PLAN-##
Selection Profiles for Freight Orders
SEL-##
Selection Profiles for Freight Bookings
SEL-##
Selection Profiles for Transportation Units
SEL-##
Layout
LAYOUT-##
a) Open the Planning folder and choose Planning —* Transportation Cockpit b) Select your transportation cockpit using the data in the table. c) Choose Continue. 7. Perform manual planning with FTL-## using drag and drop functionality on your freight unit to CUST##-17. a) Select the freight unit to CUST##-17. b) Drag the freight unit to vehicle resource FTL-## and drop the freight unit on the resource. 8. Confirm that a freight order with a temporary freight order number has been created in the order area. a) A freight order with a temporary freight order number has been created on the resource.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
9. Review the freight order in the Overview screen area. Can you explain the durations that have been calculated and that are shown? In the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area, select the temporary freight order. For example, approximately 7.5 hours (1 hour due to time zone CST vs. EST); 6.5 hours due to distance (328 mi) and speed (80km /h approx.. 50. Mph. The duration for loading/unloading is 10 minutes, and each is based on the settings that you have made in the planning profile PLAN-##____________________________________________________________________ 10. Perform manual planning with FTL-## on your freight unit to CUST##-18 using the command line. Enter the index number of the freight unit to CUST##-18, the character - and the index number of FTL-##. For example, 5-1. 11. Confirm that a freight order has been created in the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area with a temporary freight order number. a) A freight order with a temporary number has been created in the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area. 12. Review the freight order in the Overview screen area. Can you explain the durations that have been calculated and that are shown? For example, approximately 7.5 hours (1 hour due to time zone CST vs. EST); 6.5 hours due to distance (328 mi) and speed (80km /h approx., 50. Mph) The duration for loading/unloading is 10 minutes each based on the settings that you made in the planning profile PLAN-##.____ 13. To perform manual planning using the interactive map, select your freight unit to customer CUST##-16, one of the freight orders to CUST##-17 or CUST##-18 and the vehicles LTL-## and FTL-##. Assign the freight unit to the existing freight order. a) Select the freight unit to CUST##-16 in the Freight Unit Stages screen area. b) Select the freight order to CUST##-18 in the Freight Unit Stages screen area. c) Select vehicles LTL-## and FTL-## in the Vehicles screen area. d) Choose Show Map —► Selected Entries Only.. e) To show the geography of the selected items in more detail, drill into North America. f) Select the freight unit to CUST##-16 and right-click to display the context menu. g) Select Planning Options. h) Choose One Planning Option. i) Go back to the previous screen.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
14. Can you explain the planning results? In the Overview screen area, you will notice that a freight order with two stages has been created. The first stage starts at shipping point SP3100. The stages end at the two customers that are being part of this freight order: CUST##16 and CUST##-18._____________________ a) In the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area, select your freight order. 15. Switch to layout PB_LAYOUT and plan freight unit to CUST##-25 on vehicle FTL-## in the Gantt chart screen area after having maximized this area. a) In Button Page Layout, select PB_LAYOUT. b) In the Gantt Chart area, choose the Maximize button. c) Select Freight Units and Resources in the Gantt area. d) Highlight freight unit to CUST##-25 and vehicle resources FTL-## and choose Plan Selected Items. 16. Remove any overlaps (if they exist for vehicle FTL-##) by dragging and dropping freight orders in the Gantt view. Why are overlaps allowed in this case? Overlaps are allowed, because FTL-## resources are defined as multi resources. a) In the Trucks and Trailers part of the screen, drag and drop freight orders so that they do not overlap.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Create freight orders using drag and drop
•
Create freight orders using the command line
•
Create freight orders using the interactive map
•
Perform interactive planning
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 6 Lesson 4 Examining Freight Order Scheduling
LESSON OVERVIEW In this lesson, you will examine the various options available for freight order scheduling. You will learn about forward and backward scheduling, and explore the scheduling constraints and strategies that must be considered for freight order scheduling.
At the end of this lesson, you will be able to schedule a freight order. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Identify freight order scheduling options
•
Examine the optimizer planning log
Scheduling Scheduling determines start and end times for a set of dates and times such as the departure and arrival of a freight order, the pick-up and delivery of the assigned freight units, or the coupling and uncoupling of trailers. In scheduling, the system considers multiple constraints like a predefined relative ordering among the activities of the freight order as well as the pick-up windows and the delivery windows of the assigned freight units. Freight Order Scheduling
The scheduling of freight orders can be initiated in the following ways: •
From the transportation cockpit using the Scheduling button
•
From the freight order user interface using the Scheduling button
•
Automatically, by entering the departure date of a freight order and choosing ENTER on your keyboard (if the user parameter /SCMTMS/SCH_FORCE is active)
Constraints
Scheduling considers the following constraints: •
Time windows for loading and unloading activities for your freight units
•
Appointments for the freight order to which your freight units are assigned
•
Loading and unloading durations of your freight units
•
Location sequence of your freight order
•
Existing freight orders on resources
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
•
Coupling and uncoupling durations
•
Calendar resources as well as the calendars and capacities for the loading and unloading activities of handling resources
•
Calendars of the involved vehicle resources for loading, unloading, transportation, coupling and uncoupling activities
Forward Scheduling In forward scheduling, the system first defines the start and end time of the first activity to be scheduled. Afterwards, the system assigns start and end times for all succeeding activities.
Freight Unit Freight Order Figure 106: Forward Scheduling
The following example illustrates the use of forward scheduling. Customer A orders 50 pallets of product X and asks for a delivery date in three weeks. Currently, the capacity of your depot is 100 m3. Product X takes up 95 m3 of your depot. Therefore, you decide to move the goods out of your depot as soon as possible in order to minimize your inventory. That is why you decide to use forward scheduling. Backward Scheduling In backward scheduling, the system first defines the start and end time of the last activity to be scheduled. Afterwards, the system assigns start and end times for all preceding activities.
Freight Unit Freight Order Figure 107: Backward Scheduling
Customer B orders 50 pallets of product Y and asks for a delivery date in three weeks. Currently, the capacity of your depot is 100 m3. Product Y takes up 5 m3 of your depot. Therefore, you decide to stick to the delivery time window as closely as possible. That is why you decide to use backward scheduling.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Scheduling Constraints
You can use the scheduling constraints function to consider constraints for scheduling during VSR optimization. This allows VSR optimization to, for example, extend the transportation plans for long trip durations so that a driver can take his required breaks. This function only applies to vehicle resources. For example, a truck requires two days for a trip from the east coast to the west coast of the United States. However, since the driver must take breaks along the way, a longer trip duration must be scheduled. Resource Availability This concept examines resource availability. Resource Availability
Resource availability is considered for the following resources: •
Vehicle resources
•
Calendar resources
•
Handling resources
Resource Availability Considerations
Resource availability considers the following: •
Factory calendar
•
Capacity variants
•
Downtimes
•
Existing activities assigned to the resource
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Scheduling Strategies Scheduling strategies are assigned in the planning profile.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 6 Exercise 23 Schedule a Freight Order
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain the planning functionalities available in SAP TM to the client's transportation planner.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Create Freight Orders Interactively.
1. In NWBC, enter the transportation cockpit with your planning profile and selection profiles for freight units, freight bookings, transportation units and freight orders. Use your transportation cockpit layout. Use the following data: Field
Value
Selection Profile for Freight Units
SEL-##
Planning Profile
PLAN-##
Selection Profiles for Freight Orders
SEL-##
Selection Profiles for Freight Bookings
SEL-##
Selection Profiles for Transportation Units
SEL-##
Layout
LAYOUT-##
2. Use backward scheduling and manually create a freight order for your freight unit to CUST##-25 with vehicle FTL-##. 3. What is the pick-up date and time (loading time) at SP3100 and what is the delivery date and time (unloading time) at CUST##-25?
4. Use forward scheduling and manually create a freight order for your freight unit to CUST##-25 with vehicle FTL-##.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
5. What is the pick-up date and time (loading time) at SP3100 and what is the delivery date and time (unloading time) at CUST##-25? Wh
6. Assign scheduling constraints FLEET to your means of transport FTL-## and use backward scheduling to manually create a freight order for your freight unit to CUST##-25 with vehicle FTL-##. 7. What is the pick-up date and time (loading time) at SP3100 and what is the delivery date and time (unloading time) at CUST##-25? Why is it different now?
8. Can you explain the difference between the backward, forward, and backward with planning constraints planning scenarios?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 6 Solution 23 Schedule a Freight Order
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to explain the planning functionalities available in SAP TM to the client's transportation planner.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Create Freight Orders Interactively.
1. In NWBC, enter the transportation cockpit with your planning profile and selection profiles for freight units, freight bookings, transportation units and freight orders. Use your transportation cockpit layout. Use the following data: Field
Value
Selection Profile for Freight Units
SEL-##
Planning Profile
PLAN-##
Selection Profiles for Freight Orders
SEL-##
Selection Profiles for Freight Bookings
SEL-##
Selection Profiles for Transportation Units
SEL-##
Layout
LAYOUT-##
a) Open the Planning folder and choose Planning —> Transportation Cockpit. b) Select your transportation cockpit using the data in the table. c) Choose Continue. 2. Use backward scheduling and manually create a freight order for your freight unit to CUST##-25 with vehicle FTL-##. a) Select the freight unit to customer CUST##-25. b) Select the vehicle resource FTL-##/ c) Choose Plan Selected Items.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
3. What is the pick-up date and time (loading time) at SP3100 and what is the delivery date and time (unloading time) at CUST##-25? Note your pick-up and delivery times. These will vary._________________________________ a) Highlight the freight order in the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area and review the exact scheduling in the Overview screen area. 4. Use forward scheduling and manually create a freight order for your freight unit to CUST##-25 with vehicle FTL-##. a) Choose Change Planning Settings. b) Change the scheduling direction from Backward to Forward. c) Choose OK. d) Select the freight unit to customer CUST##-25. e) Select the vehicle resource FTL-##/ f) Choose Plan Selected Items. 5. What is the pick-up date and time (loading time) at SP3100 and what is the delivery date and time (unloading time) at CUST##-25? Wh Note that the pick-up and delivery times vary. It is different now, because in the previous step the scheduling has been done backward from the delivery date and time, while it is done forward from the pick-up date and time in this step.__________________________________ a) Highlight the freight order in the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area and review the exact scheduling in the Overview screen area. 6. Assign scheduling constraints FLEET to your means of transport FTL-## and use backward scheduling to manually create a freight order for your freight unit to CUST##-25 with vehicle FTL-##. a) In Customizing for TM, choose SAP Transportation Management —>Transportation Management —>Planning —>General Settings —>Define Scheduling Constraints. b) Choose Means-of-Transport Constraints in the navigation pane. c) Choose New Entries. d) Enter the following values: Field
Value
Means of Transport
F T L -# #
Constraint Set ID
FLEET
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
e) Save your data and return to the transportation cockpit. f) Choose £2 Refresh and choose OK in the dialog box. g) Select the freight unit to customer CUST##-25 and the vehicle FTL-## and choose Plan Selected Item. 7. What is the pick-up date and time (loading time) at SP3100 and what is the delivery date and time (unloading time) at CUST##-25? Why is it different now? It is different now because in the previous step the scheduling is forward from the delivery date and time, while in this step, it is backward and considers also scheduling constraints from the pick-up date and time.__________________________________________________ a) Select the freight order in the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area and review the exact scheduling in the Overview screen area. b) Make a note of the pick-up and delivery times. 8. Can you explain the difference between the backward, forward, and backward with planning constraints planning scenarios? Backward scheduling schedules from the delivery window into the past. Forward scheduling schedules from the pick-up window into the future. When scheduling constraints are considered, the duration for transportation activities is extended by the approximate break time that truck drivers must take.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Optimizer Planning Log You can obtain a detailed overview of the data that flows into the VSR optimization run and the results that are output. In this way, you can quickly and easily recognize how the VSR optimization optimizes the costs. Prerequisite
You set user parameter /SCMTMS/EXP to X to allow for the logging of the optimizer data for optimization runs that you start interactively. The explanation tool for VSR optimization displays the following information: •
Input for the VSR optimization run
•
Results of the VSR optimization run
•
Solution overview
Content of the Optimizer Planning Log / Explanation Protocol Input
•
Freight units
•
Transportation documents
•
Freight bookings
•
Resources
•
Transportation network
•
Incompatibilities
•
Conditions
•
Dimensions
•
Parameters
Results Freight units Transportation documents Freight bookings Solution details Resources
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Identify freight order scheduling options
•
Examine the optimizer planning log
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 6
Learning Assessment
1. Detail four changes that can be made to the layout of the transportation cockpit.
2. In the layout of the transportation cockpit, you can change the time zone in which to present time-related information. Determine whether this statement is true or false. | True False 3. How can you create freight orders manually in the transportation cockpit? Choose the correct answers. | A Using drag-and-drop B Using freight unit building rules | C Using command line planning 4. Determine which of the following statements are true: Choose the correct answers. | A Several freight units can be assigned to a freight order. B One freight unit can be assigned to several freight orders. C One freight unit stage can be assigned to multiple freight orders.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Detail four changes that can be made to the layout of the transportation cockpit. There are five possible changes that can be made to the layout of the transportation cockpit. The time zone in which to present time-related information, the unit of distance, the position and width of the tabs on the screen, the visibility of tabs, and the sequence and number of rows and columns visible can all be changed to suit your requirements.___________________ 2. In the layout of the transportation cockpit, you can change the time zone in which to present time-related information. Determine whether this statement is true or false. [x ] True False That is correct. In the transportation cockpit, you can change the time zone in which to present time-related information. 3. How can you create freight orders manually in the transportation cockpit? Choose the correct answers.
|~xj
A Using drag-and-drop B Using freight unit building rules
|~xj C
Using command line planning
That is correct. You can create freight orders manually using drag-and-drop or using command line planning. Although you can create freight orders using freight building rules, this is an automatic process.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
4. Determine which of the following statements are true: Choose the correct answers. |~X~| A Several freight units can be assigned to a freight order. [x ] B One freight unit can be assigned to several freight orders. C One freight unit stage can be assigned to multiple freight orders. That is correct. Several freight units can be assigned to a freight order and one freight unit can be assigned to several freight orders. However, each stage of a freight unit can only be assigned to one freight order.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
UNIT 7
Carrier Selection
Lesson 1 Performing Carrier Selection Exercise 24: Execute Carrier Selection
306 315
Lesson 2 Tendering Freight Orders Exercise 25: Tender a Freight Order
321 327
UNIT OBJECTIVES
•
Define the parameters of the carrier selection process
•
Manage carrier constraints and allocations
•
Edit carrier selection settings
•
Execute carrier selection
•
Describe the freight tendering process
•
Tender a freight order
•
Describe communication methods for tendering
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 7 Lesson 1 Performing Carrier Selection
LESSON OVERVIEW Carrier selection is used to determine the right combination of carrier or carrier assignments based on cost, equipment availability, priority, and business share goals. In this lesson, you will learn about assigning suitable carriers to freight orders - either manually or automatically. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Define the parameters of the carrier selection process
•
Manage carrier constraints and allocations
•
Edit carrier selection settings
•
Execute carrier selection
Carrier Selection Process Carrier S e le c tio n ^ !
E xecute C a rrie r S electio n
1-step Planning
Check Incompatibilities Determine TCM or Internal Costs
Transportation Allocations
Business Shares
Continuous Move
Build Ranking List
Automatic ^ Assignment
L
Manual Assignment
Available Carriers
L
Tendering
Figure 109: Carrier Selection Process Flow
Once a freight order has been built, a shipper will need to choose (and communicate with) the business partner responsible for moving the product. We will refer to this as carrier selection.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Carrier selection is used to assign a suitable carrier to your subcontractable business documents (for example, freight orders), either manually or automatically. The aim is to find a carrier with the lowest costs under consideration of the defined constraints. In manual carrier selection, you manually assign the required carrier to your business documents. If you have configured a check against transportation allocations, the system takes this into account and checks transportation capacities (transportation allocations) that you have defined for the individual carriers. If, during the allocation, the system finds relevant transportation allocations without capacity or that certain rules are violated by the allocation, warning messages appear. A separate optimization is available for automatic carrier selection. It takes selected optimization options into account when determining the most cost-effective carrier for all business documents that you have selected. If none of the carriers are available, the system does not assign any carrier to the relevant business documents. Strategy Options
During planning in SAP TM, strategies are defined which are optimization options for carrier selection. The system takes these strategies into account during the automatic carrier selection process. You define strategies either in the transportation lane or in carrier selection settings. Initially, the system considers the appropriate transportation lane for each freight order. This allows it to consider different settings in one run. Taking strategies and settings into consideration, the optimizer then creates a carrier ranking list containing the different carrier options. The strategy options supported are as follows: •
Cost and Priority
•
Business Share
•
Transportation Allocation
•
Continuous Move
Costs and Priorities in Carrier Selection In carrying out carrier selection, the system can put more weight on priorities or costs. In terms of priority, the system can determine the most favorable carrier based on the priorities you have defined. In effect, this means that the system chooses the carrier with the highest priority, while taking into account the various restrictions that may be in place. Alternatively, the system can determine the carrier on the basis of lowest total cost. Costs in this case can refer to internal costs or to charges calculated in charge management (we will look at this option in a separate lesson). Internal Costs
Internal costs draw on transportation costs and carrier costs as defined for your carriers. For example, you may have defined a transportation cost per business document (freight order, for example), or you could have defined a transportation cost per unit of weight or volume. Carrier costs are typically defined per unit of distance - kms or miles. You define internal costs in the transportation lane or in the carrier profile.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Note: When we speak of internal costs here, we are not speaking of real world costs. Internal costs are used for weighting only, as part of the carrier selection process.
Business Share Formalised firm relationships often exist with carriers in the form of contracts. These contracts can guarantee an amount of business to be allocated to a carrier which, if not met, would result in penalties. SAP TM has the tools to track these relationships and to divide business appropriately between different carriers. This supports the negotiation of freight agreements, and avoids dependency on a single vendor. The idea is to use a fixed percentage to dictate the assignment of jobs to certain carriers. The system can also take the capacity of a carrier in relation to certain routes or geographical areas into account when generating assignments.
When defining the business share context, you create business share buckets. These define the actual business share a carrier is allowed to have. There are different types of buckets available for business share creation - yearly, quarterly, monthly, weekly, and daily. Business Example
Carrier A has a weekly bucket equating to 75% of the business share on the lane between Hamburg and Frankfurt, between the validity period —01.01.2017 to 31.12.2017. In the same context, carrier B can have a defined weekly bucket of 25%. Penalties
You can define tolerances and penalty costs in relation to business share. As long as the business share for a specific carrier is within the tolerance limits, it does not affect the cost calculations during carrier ranking. Once the share allocation goes beyond a defined level, however, penalties
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
start to apply. Tolerances are always defined in percentage terms. Penalties are maintained as numeric values. This number (the penalty) is multiplied by the deviation percentage (the amount outside the defined tolerance range) to arrive at the penalty cost. Example
A penalty of 1,000 is defined. An excess tolerance of 10% is also defined. During business share calculation, if the excess is 12%, the excess liable for penalty is 2%. This 2 is multiplied by 1,000 to arrive at the total excess penalty cost of 2,000. Currencies in Penalty Costs
When calculating the total costs for a carrier, if you are working with charge management costs, there will be a currency assigned to the charge management costs. To assign a currency to business share penalty costs, this has to be defined under Carrier Selection Settings —>Advanced Settings —>Common Currency. If you are working with carriers from multiple geographic locations with multiple currencies, to arrive at the correct ranking, the system uses the internal common currency (maintained in the carrier selection settings) for its calculations. The currency displayed in the carrier ranking list is always the local currency of the carrier (the one maintained in the freight agreement). All freight orders in a business share context are selected for the business share penalty calculations, although these freight orders are not selected during the planning run. Business Example
Assume that in a business share context we have two carriers, A & B. No tolerances have been defined. Carrier A is awarded 60% and carrier B 40%. There are already 10 freight orders awarded, of which carrier A is assigned 6 and carrier B is assigned 4. Now let’s perform carrier selection for an 11th freight order. If carrier B is assigned this FO, carrier A will have a shortfall of business share. If the freight order is assigned to carrier A, carrier B will have a shortfall of business shares. Both options are evaluated by the system and ranked according to their suitability. Allocations Transportation allocations allow companies to assign defined quantities of capacity to certain business partners. This includes set minimum or maximum capacity restrictions that regulate how much business is allowed with a certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of transport. A separate business object is used to model these allocations.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
C a rrie r 1 allo cates 20 tru c k s /d a y (cap acity)
L o catio n /Z o ne A to L o catio n /Z o ne B
C a rrie r 2 allo c a te s 40 tru c k s /d a y (cap acity)
Figure 111: Transportation Allocation
Carrier Selection Master Data C a rrie r
Change of Transportation Lane PMA-PL1000 •> PMA-DE-CUST-01
ESM H
aas
3 <3|i B|i
BP N um ber
PM A-CA R-02
Means ofTransport iM Tr Start date End Date FixDura Trsp. Dur. FixDist Trsp. Dist Unit Precisi 100 PM1.FTl.El. 01012010 31 122099 □ 433.000 KM 3:55 □ PM1.LTL.EU 01.01.2010 31 122099 □ 3:35 ~D~I 359.461 KM «►
ESHdffl ®HMDS® EfflSM Carrier For Means ofTrans PM1_FTl_EU
1tnrt Dl In
PMA-CAR-02 PM1_F 010120'31.12 20? 1.050 — pma-lak-uj— FTrm m nTfnrrzTO !— r a r PMA-CAR-04 PM1.F 010120" 31 12205 1.000 KM
T
Ri 10 u,lr 0.00
3 --- T 0
Figure 112: CarrierSelectionSettingsLaneMeansOfTransport_Screenshot.pptx
Carrier selection can be influenced by settings in the transportation lane. Within the transportation lane, available carriers are defined for each means of transport. The transportation lane selection settings are as follows: •
Business share rules
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
•
Defined cost origin
•
Logic of carrier selection
Trade lanes may be used to build up a hierarchy that is more generic. Trade lanes imply more specific trade lanes. For example, “within Germany by truck” implies “ From Frankfurt to Hamburg by chilled truck" and “within Bavaria using a truck for liquids” . Trade lanes may also overlap. For example, "from Germany by airplane" and “within Europe by airplane". Trade lane hierarchies include the following elements, and their implications: •
Transportation zone hierarchy. “ From Germany” implies “from Bavaria” , which implies “from plant in Munich” .
•
Means of transport hierarchy. "Within Germany by truck” implies “within Germany by chilled truck".
•
Means of transport - mode of transport relations. "Within Germany by road” implies “within Germany by chilled truck” .
Carrier Selection Settings
Included in optimization is a carrier selection setting. Although some of the same settings are available in the carrier settings on the transportation lane, these settings override settings maintained directly on the lane. The settings in this profile are based on strategies such as lowest cost, business share, or priority. It considers continuous move options and equipment allocations and can tender automatically based on the tendering strategy. The profile also contains more enhanced settings, such as the ability to automatically perform carrier selection after vehicle scheduling and routing. Carrier Selection Ranking When using automatic carrier selection, the system will create a carrier ranking list of the relevant carriers for a particular shipment. For each relevant carrier, users can see a variety of information that influenced the selection process. This could include the means of transport cost, delivery performance ratings, and others. After automatic carrier selection has been performed, the ranking list will be visible in the freight order. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Continuous Moves
Simple Move
Freight Order 1
Freight Order 2 C a rrie r 1
Freight Order 2
Round Trip
C a rrie r 1
Freight Order 1 Figure 115: Continuous Moves
Continuous move scenarios can identify opportunities to avoid empty runs or utilize capacity more effectively. As part of automatic carrier selection, the system tries to combine freight orders by forming continuous moves. The aim is to reduce the costs of the freight order by assigning additional freight orders to the same carrier. The following types of continuous move are available:
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
•
Simple continuous move: The carrier accepts one or more additional freight orders directly after executing the first freight order.
•
Round trip: The start location of the first freight order and the destination location of the second freight order are identical.
The system cannot take into account complex round trips where multiple source locations (pick up) or destination locations (delivery) are served.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 7 Exercise 24 Execute Carrier Selection
Business Example
You have been asked to investigate the carrier selection process for a typical load between a given origin and destination location.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Create Freight Orders Interactively.
1. Assign carrier selection setting CSEL_3100_00 to your planning profile. 2. In NWBC, enter the transportation cockpit with your planning profile and selection profiles for freight units, freight bookings, transportation units and freight orders. Use your transportation cockpit layout. Use the following data: Field
Value
Selection Profile for Freight Units
S E L -# #
Planning Profile
P L A N -# #
Selection Profile for Freight Orders
S E L -# #
Selection Profiles for Freight Bookings
S E L -# #
Selection Profile for Transportation Units
S E L -# #
Layout
L A Y O U T -# #
3. Manually create a freight order with the freight unit to CUST##-28 by dragging it to vehicle FTL-##. Take note of the freight order number. 4. Is this freight order relevant for subcontracting? Hint: Select the Carrier Ranking tab in the Subcontracting tab.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
5. Has carrier selection been processed for this order? Hint: Select the Carrier Ranking tab in the Subcontracting tab..
6. Perform carrier selection for this freight order. Use carrier selection profile CSEL_3100_00. 7. How are the carriers ranked?
8. Why is carrier CAR##-01 ranked first?
9. While this order has triggered carrier selection, how can you tell if it has been tendered?
10. Save the freight order. 11. In NWBC, review the transportation lane US-##. 12. Which carriers are valid for means of transport FTL-##?
13. What is the carrier selection strategy for means of transport FTL-##?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 7 Solution 24 Execute Carrier Selection
Business Example
You have been asked to investigate the carrier selection process for a typical load between a given origin and destination location.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Create Freight Orders Interactively.
1. Assign carrier selection setting CSEL_3100_00 to your planning profile. a) In NWBC, open the Application Administration folder and choose Planning —> Planning Profiles —> Edit Planning Profiles. b) Enter p l a
n
-# #
and continue.
c) In the Profile Assignment screen area, enter Carrier Selection Setting CSEL_3100_00. d) Save your data. 2. In NWBC, enter the transportation cockpit with your planning profile and selection profiles for freight units, freight bookings, transportation units and freight orders. Use your transportation cockpit layout. Use the following data: Field
Value
Selection Profile for Freight Units
S E L -# #
Planning Profile
P L A N -# #
Selection Profile for Freight Orders
S E L -# #
Selection Profiles for Freight Bookings
S E L -# #
Selection Profile for Transportation Units
S E L -# #
Layout
L A Y O U T -# #
a) In NWBC, select the Planning folder. b) Choose Planning —> Transportation Cockpit.. c) On the Profile and Layout Sets selection screen, choose the appropriate row or enter the table data and then choose Continue.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
3. Manually create a freight order with the freight unit to CUST##-28 by dragging it to vehicle FTL-##. Take note of the freight order number. a) Select the freight unit to customer CUST##-28. b) Drag it to vehicle FTL-## and drop it. c) Save your data. d) Record your order number. 4. Is this freight order relevant for subcontracting? Hint: Select the Carrier Ranking tab in the Subcontracting tab. Yes, based on the Subcontracting Relevance field, which is set to Relevant for Subcontracting. This is a result of the freight order type settings defined during configuration._________________________________________________________________ a) Drill into the newly created freight order by choosing the document number in the Freight Orders/ Freight Bookings screen area. 5. Has carrier selection been processed for this order? Hint: Select the Carrier Ranking tab in the Subcontracting tab.. No. No carriers are listed on the Carrier Ranking tab.__________________________________ 6. Perform carrier selection for this freight order. Use carrier selection profile CSEL_3100_00. a) In the menu bar, choose Edit and then choose Subcontracting —>Carrier Selection. b) In the Carrier Selection Settings window, enter c s e l _3100_00 and choose OK.
7. How are the carriers ranked? CAR##-01 is ranked first, and CAR##-02 is ranked second.____________________________ 8. Why is carrier CAR##-01 ranked first? Carrier CAR##-01 has a cost of 1,036.33 USD/load and a priority (Carrier Peer-to-Peer Tendering Priority) of 1. CAR##-02 has a cost of 1,266.63 USD/load and a priority of 1. Since the priorities are the same, the cost is the overall determining factor. If an allocation process had been used, it would be noted in the subcontracting relevance status._________________ 9. While this order has triggered carrier selection, how can you tell if it has been tendered? The order has not been tendered. You know that because the Tendering Overview tab of the freight order is blank. Had the order been tendered, there would be additional information here.________________________________________________________________________ 10. Save the freight order.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
11. In NWBC, review the transportation lane US-##. a) Choose the Master Data folder. b) Choose Transportation Network —>Transportation Lanes —>Define Transportation Lane. c) In the Start Location/Zone field, enter US-##. d) In the Dest. Loc./Zone field, enter US-##.
e) Choose Display. 12. Which carriers are valid for means of transport FTL-##? Choose means of transport FTL-##. You can see that carriers CAR##-01 and CAR##-02 are the only carriers that are valid for means of transport FTL-##.__________________________ 13. What is the carrier selection strategy for means of transport FTL-##? Look at the details panel on the right. First, under Strategy, you can see the transportation lane is relevant to selection because the Relevant to Carrier Selection checkbox is selected. The strategy is calculated by costs, and the origin of the cost is based on internal costs. No continuous move type is assigned.________________________________________________
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Define the parameters of the carrier selection process
•
Manage carrier constraints and allocations
•
Edit carrier selection settings
•
Execute carrier selection
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 7 Lesson 2 Tendering Freight Orders
LESSON OVERVIEW Once a freight order has been built and a carrier selected, your business needs to let the appropriate parties know they have been selected. In this lesson you will investigate how SAP TM can support this process of order tendering. LESSON OBJECTIVES After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe the freight tendering process
•
Tender a freight order
•
Describe communication methods for tendering
Freight Tendering Once carrier selection has taken place, communication with the selected carrier needs to be initiated. This process is referred to as order tendering. Different tendering processes can be deployed depending upon the technology used by the carrier. You use this process to tender (offer) a freight order to one or more potential carriers. Tendering is a bidding process, in which you request one or multiple carriers to submit a quote for a transportation service that is defined in a freight order. You can select the carrier that you want to execute the transportation service by evaluating the quotes. The main characteristics of the tendering process are flexible configuration and the reduction of required manual interaction to support ease of use and lower total cost of ownership (TCO).
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Carrier Selection I 1-step Planning Check Incompatibilities Determine TCM or Internal Costs
E xecute C a rrie r S electio n
Transportation Allocations
Business Shares
Continuous Move
Build Ranking List
Automatic Assignment
Manual Assignment
O rd e r T e n d e rin g !
Available Carriers
Tendering
Figure 116: Subcontracting: Tendering - Context Process Flow
Tendering Types In general, there are two types of tendering. Short term tendering is where tendering is executed based on specific orders. This is known as order tendering. SAP TM supports the following short term tendering scenarios: •
Peer-to-Peer Tendering
•
Broadcast Tendering
The strategies for each are determined in planning profiles in SAP TM. Parties and Roles in the Tendering Process
At least two parties are involved in the tendering process - a customer who wants to subcontract a transportation service that is defined in a freight order, and a supplier (subcontractor) or carrier, who potentially carries out the transportation service. There are two roles on the customer side of the tendering process. The first is a transportation dispatcher, who is responsible for the transportation service, that is, the freight order. The second is the tendering manager, who is responsible for configuring and executing the tendering process and acquiring an acceptable quote from a carrier to perform the transportation service. Manual and Automatic Tendering
When a transportation dispatcher initiates the tendering process, they have two options: manual process configuration or automatic tendering. If they want to tender only a single freight order, the transportation dispatcher can choose between the two options. If they initiate a tendering process using manual configuration, the tendering manager must configure and start the tendering process manually. If the transportation dispatcher wants to tender more than one freight order, they must initiate automatic tendering and use the automatic tendering configuration in the system.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Peer-to-Peer Tendering
1.
Carrier ABC 2.
RFQ
Carrier XYZ 3.
Freight Order
Carrier 123 4.
Carrier DEF 5.
Carrier 789
Sequential Processing
L
Step/Carr...
Tendering Type
▼
Peer-to-Peer Tendering - Response Required
Step 1
Tendering Process ▼
Freight RFQ Based, Award Automatically
▼
Freight RFQ Based, Award Manually Freight RFQ Based, Award Automatically Direct Tendering, Send Freight Order Directly
Figure 117: Peer to Peer Tendering
Peer-to-peer tendering is a process whereby freight orders are tendered sequentially or offered to preselected carriers. Order Tendering Process: Peer To Peer Exam ple Process: Peer-to-Peer Tendering
Freight Order
Carrier Selection
Freight Order Carrier Tendering Quotation ■ Request for ■ RFQ Quotation acceptance / (RFQ) rejection with creation & price publishing quotation
Freight Quotation Evaluation & Carrier Assignment ■ Carrier ranking ■ Embedded analytics for decision support
Freight Order Update, & Sending to Carrier
Figure 118: Order Tendering Process - Peer To Peer
Peer-to-peer tendering involves the sequential sending of freight requests for quotation (freight RFQs) to each proposed carrier. The system waits until the carrier sends a freight quotation (FQ) or until the maximum response time has passed. If the carrier does not send a quote within the maximum response time, the peer-to-peer tendering process continues, and the system sends a request for quote to the next carrier. If peer-to-peer tendering ends without an acceptable quote, the tendering process continues with the next tendering process step that you have configured. If the carrier sends a quote before the maximum response time has elapsed, the system evaluates the quote and can either accept or reject it. In the case of rejection, a new RFQ is sent out. The process continues until at least one acceptable FQ has been received. The system awards this a Quotation Acceptable evaluation result and the process ends successfully. There are two types of peer-to-peer tendering: response required and no response required. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Broadcast Tendering
Broadcast tendering is a tender process whereby freight orders are simultaneously tendered (offered) to preselected carriers. All carriers have to respond within a given maximum response time. There are two types of broadcast tendering: best offer and first acceptable offer. Depending on which one of these is being used, either the first acceptable quote wins or, after the maximum response time, the system evaluates all the acceptable quotes and selects the carrier that has submitted the quote with the lowest price. If broadcast tendering ends without an acceptable quote, the tendering process continues with the next tendering process step that you have configured.
RFQ F re ig h t O rd e r
First Come, First Served SteptCarr...
Tendering Type
▼
Broadcast Tendering - Best Otter
Stepl
Tendering Process ▼
Freight RFQ Based, Award Automalicaty
▼
Freight RFQ Based, Award Manually Freight RFQ Based, Award Automaticaly Direct Tendering, Send Freight Order Directly
Figure 119: Broadcast Tendering
Tendering Profiles The tendering profile contains basic tendering data and is a prerequisite for automatic tendering. You can use a tendering profile when you manually create a tendering plan. Within the profile, you can define multi-step tendering. This allows a company to mix tendering types. For example, you can first use peer-to-peer tendering, and if this is unsuccessful you can use broadcast tendering. In a tendering profile, you can make settings in relation to the following options: •
Choose from tendering variants - direct, peer-to-peer, broadcasting (best offer, first acceptable offer)
•
Choose fully or semi-automatic rules-based tendering (response time and price limits, automatic re-tendering)
•
Configure the tendering process and RFQ publishing
•
Set up web-based, e-mail, SMS, B2B tendering communication
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
•
Set up authorization-based RFQ processing and data visibility (carrier authorization to change the price and delivery dates, view tender price limit, stop date and rejection code reasons, support of free text and attachments)
•
Make settings in relation to currency
•
Maintain event monitoring and exception-based management
RFQUpdates TALan...
Relative Price...
No Update ▼ 100% No Update Update, Do Not Free Up TALUpon Rejection Update, Free Up TALand BS Upon Rejection
A.
MaxmumResp... Carner-Speciti... 99:59
0
VisiMty Settings .DEFAULT
Figure 120: Tendering Profile
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 7 Exercise 25 Tender a Freight Order
Business Example
Before a freight order can be transported, it must be offered to, accepted by, and assigned to a carrier. This assignment could be part of a long-term arrangement or a once-off arrangement. In either case, you must be able to initiate the tendering process and understand the role it plays in the overall transportation process.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Execute Carrier Selection. You must have successfully performed the preceding exercise on executing carrier selection before proceeding with tendering a freight order. 1. Tender the freight order created in the previous exercise using tendering profile TM120_00_TEND_PROFILE. 2. What is the status of tendering step 1?
3. What is the status of the RFQ sent to the first carrier?
4. Has an RFQ been sent to the second carrier?
5. Save the freight order and note the RFQ number. 6. The next steps in this exercise round out the process by creating a quotation. Accept the tendering freight order on behalf of CAR##-01.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
7. Go back to the freight order. What is the response code of the quotation?
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 7 Solution 25 Tender a Freight Order
Business Example
Before a freight order can be transported, it must be offered to, accepted by, and assigned to a carrier. This assignment could be part of a long-term arrangement or a once-off arrangement. In either case, you must be able to initiate the tendering process and understand the role it plays in the overall transportation process.
Note: Required: This exercise is dependent on the completion of the exercise Execute Carrier Selection. You must have successfully performed the preceding exercise on executing carrier selection before proceeding with tendering a freight order. 1. Tender the freight order created in the previous exercise using tendering profile TM120_00_TEND_PROFILE. a) Open the Freight Order Management folder and choose Road —> Edit Road Freight Order. b) Enter the freight order number from the previous exercise and continue. c) In the application toolbar, choose Subcontracting —► Automatic Tendering. d) Enter tendering profile
t m
i
2 0 _ 0 0 _
t e n d
_
p r o f il e
and choose OK.
e) Save your data. 2. What is the status of tendering step 1? In process.__________________________________ 3. What is the status of the RFQ sent to the first carrier? Open._______________________________ 4. Has an RFQ been sent to the second carrier? No._____________________________________ 5. Save the freight order and note the RFQ number.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected] © Copyright. All rights reserved.
329
Visit : www.erpexams.com
6. The next steps in this exercise round out the process by creating a quotation. Accept the tendering freight order on behalf of CAR##-01. a) In NWBC, open the Freight Order Management folder and choose Road —► Overview Tendering. b) Choose Freight RFQs-Open (). c) Choose your RFQ number. d) Choose Edit and select the row with the quotation. e) Choose Create Quotation. f) Select the row with the quotation and choose Submit Quotation and Save. 7. Go back to the freight order. What is the response code of the quotation? The response code of the quotation is accepted.________________________________ a) Go back to the freight order and choose Refresh. b) On the Subcontracting tab, review the tendering overview.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Communication Method Tendering As part of the tendering process, it is important to review the communication methods that support the tendering scenarios. For carriers who may not be able to support EDI (electronic data interchange) scenarios, SAP has developed a Web Ul to improve communication. This requires subcontractors to log on to SAP TM using the Web in order to process a freight order. On a periodic basis, each subcontractor views their RFQs (modeled as tendering requests) and submits quotations (modeled as tendering responses). Each subcontractor is provided with their own user IDs and passwords, as well as the relevant authorization to restrict visibility to only the loads that have been tendered to them. Additional methods are supported, such as receiving RFQs by e-mail and SMS and submitting quotations by e-mail without the need to access an SAP TM system at all. In this case, an RFQ is sent to a carrier by e-mail or SMS message. The carrier responds to the e-mail using a regular email client on a PC or a mobile device. The e-mail is then converted (using PI) into a quotation. Carriers can accept RFQs directly, reject them with a specified reason, or accept them with changes.
Freight Order Root / Subcontracting Tendering Tendering Step Tendering Request Tendering Response
X I M essage
Figure 121: Tendering Communication Methods
Advanced Communication
If a subcontractor is more technically advanced, B2B communication can be utilised. In this situation, a copy of the freight order is created for the carrier (the tendering manager or system administrator can control what is included in the copy that is visible to the carrier). The copy is persisted in the system to retain what was communicated to the carrier. A freight request for quotation (tendering request) is sent via PI and received as a forwarding quotation in the supplier's SAP TM system. The carrier can accept the order directly or, if the first carrier rejects the order, the freight order will be sent to the next carrier. Finally, a quotation confirmation is sent back to the customer and is converted into a quotation (tendering response) in the customer’s SAP TM system. The Change Controller allows you to react to changes in the FO, for example, by stopping tendering when there are major changes in the FO. For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Mobile Tendering Freight RFQs can easily be integrated with carriers who cannot implement a complex B2B integration. Mobile tendering allows a mobile device to receive new RFQs, respond to RFQs, and include changes to dates and prices. Users can check addresses and routes on the map, e-mail or phone the contact person, create a calendar entry for awarded tenders, and check other appointments in the calendar.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
LESSON SUMMARY You should now be able to:
•
Describe the freight tendering process
•
Tender a freight order
•
Describe communication methods for tendering
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
Unit 7
Learning Assessment
1. In relation to costs and priorities in carrier selection, internal costs do not refer to real world costs but rather to virtual costs assigned to carriers, documents, units and so on throughout the transportation process. These internal costs are used for weighting only. Determine whether this statement is true or false. | True False 2. Based on what you have learned about business share in transportation planning, which of the following statements is true? Choose the correct answer. | A Business share is an in-built mechanism in SAP TM to ensure that all carriers in a region have sufficient business. B Business share buckets provide a means for numerous shippers to pool together to create merged (shared) freight orders. | C Business share settings define the percentage of business to be allocated to various carriers. Costs are incurred for non-adherence and the system takes these into account during optimization. D A company may have working formalized relationships with a number of carriers. Business share allocation ensures that all carriers receive the same amount of business from the company. 3. Broadcast tendering refers to a process whereby all quotations received (in response to an RFQ) are broadcast to all carriers in an effort to improve transparency. Determine whether this statement is true or false. | True False
0
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
4. Which tendering types are defined in SAP Transportation Management? Choose the correct answers. | A Peer-to-peer tendering-no response required B Peer-to-peer tendering- response required C Broadcast tendering- first acceptable offer D Open tendering-price limit
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
Unit 7
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. In relation to costs and priorities in carrier selection, internal costs do not refer to real world costs but rather to virtual costs assigned to carriers, documents, units and so on throughout the transportation process. These internal costs are used for weighting only. Determine whether this statement is true or false. [x ] True False Correct. Internal costs do not imply real world costs and are used for weighting only. 2. Based on what you have learned about business share in transportation planning, which of the following statements is true? Choose the correct answer. | A Business share is an in-built mechanism in SAP TM to ensure that all carriers in a region have sufficient business. B Business share buckets provide a means for numerous shippers to pool together to create merged (shared) freight orders. |~X~| C Business share settings define the percentage of business to be allocated to various carriers. Costs are incurred for non-adherence and the system takes these into account during optimization. D A company may have working formalized relationships with a number of carriers. Business share allocation ensures that all carriers receive the same amount of business from the company. Correct. Business share settings define the amount of business (%) to be allocated to various shippers.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
3. Broadcast tendering refers to a process whereby all quotations received (in response to an RFQ) are broadcast to all carriers in an effort to improve transparency. Determine whether this statement is true or false. True False Correct. Broadcast tendering refers to a scenario in which an RFQ is sent to multiple carriers at the same time and the responses are then evaluated. This is in contrast to peer-to-peer tendering, which is sequential. 4. Which tendering types are defined in SAP Transportation Management? Choose the correct answers.
|~xj
A Peer-to-peer tendering-no response required
|~xj
B Peer-to-peer tendering-response required
|~xj C
Broadcast tendering- first acceptable offer
D Open tendering-price limit That is correct. Peer-to-peer tendering- no response required, peer-to-peer tenderingresponse required, and broadcast tendering- first acceptable offer are tendering types available in SAP Transportation Management.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : [email protected]
0
Visit : www.erpexams.com